WRITING Godder-wtf how do you spell this (╯°□°)╯︵ ┻━┻: A Spoof

Status
Not open for further replies.

firejay1

The Phoenix
Original poster
DONATING MEMBER
FOLKLORE MEMBER
Invitation Status
  1. Look for groups
  2. Looking for partners
Posting Speed
  1. Multiple posts per day
  2. 1-3 posts per day
  3. One post per day
  4. 1-3 posts per week
  5. One post per week
  6. Slow As Molasses
Online Availability
My times are pretty erratic, but I try to avoid being on EST 11pm-9am.
Writing Levels
  1. Intermediate
  2. Adept
  3. Advanced
  4. Adaptable
Preferred Character Gender
  1. Male
  2. Female
Genres
Fantasy, Modern, Historical Romance.
So as some of you may or may not know, one of our loverly admin, @Jorick, ended up writing a long story for all of you adorable dweebs on the site who ended up donating over 3000 bucks (yes, literally) to Iwaku! Somewhere along the way, I ended up donating a little to make the cents even and quelle surprise discovered that meant I was in the story (well, I was actually surprised about that cause my memory is crap and I thought ppl donating over 10 only got a minimention in the story), and while I was jabbering about what he could do with my character, this happened:

Silly Story.JPG

UNFORTUNATELY, I had no ideas for it and + can't carry a story decently b/c my characters decide to do whatever the heck they wanna and ruin any plots I had in mind. But then @The Mood is Write so helpfully provided me with inspiration today in the form of a dream about the staff members attending a carnival, and I decided I would make it a thing. You can give me input wherever you will, but I'm not writing this because you all donated whatever you did. I'm not necessarily going to take your input if I don't wanna.

BE FOREWARNED. This is a SATIRE. Ish. Thing. If I'm remembering the definition of a satire correctly. There's going to be a lot of snarky (and possibly rude) humor in it, and bits of it won't really make sense, but the characters are gonna roll with it as if it does. It's not meant to accurately reflect anything of any sort, and is more going to be making fun of everything and everybody included in it. Myself, included.

I'm not gonna have a Table of Contents because I am LAZY. It's also going to be more poorly written than Gotterdammerung (yes I know how to spell it though I can't do the fancy letters b/c normal keyboard), because I just don't got his level of douche. Live with it. Cheers.

So it seems we ARE going to have a Table of Contents after all because it turns out I am lazier about scrolling than I am about linking some stuff in a post.

Table of Contents

Prologue - Chocolate Dogs Tell No Tales (they can try, but....) (882 words)
Chapter 1 - The Breaking of Wind (6,631 words)
Chapter 2 - Bind, Bite, Blind (the Tongue Twister Series for Young Torturers) (11,410 words)
Extra #1 - The Age of the Gods (2,548 words)
Chapter 3 - Lots of Twenties (should have been the last chapter's title) (11,794 words)
Extra #2 - The Mid-Age (2,516 words)
Chapter 4 - Holey Pokie (22,619 words)
Chapter 5 - The Flashbacks Start in Earnest (11,406 words)
Extra #3 - The Age of Mortals (4,476 words)


Cast List
Ordered by Time First Named Approximately-ish, Extra Nicknames 2 B Added​

Brie Rhys, Ricey - @FieryCold
Sophie Outis, Nemo, the Nonexistent, the Second Creation without Breath - @Nemopedia
Jorick the Separating, Spinach, Baelish(es), First Creation of the God of Form, the Formless - @Jorick
Astaroth - @Astaroth
Kitti - @Kitti
Pahndora de Mie - @Pahndemic
Peregrine Falk - @Peregrine
Madelyn Wren, Moody - @The Mood is Write
Cherilyn Underhill of the Shire/Hobbit - @Shirelin
Marissa Kellenghan, Friend to the Separated, Keeper of the Scales, Dismantler of Wars - @rissa
Anaia Tsukasa, the Immortal Hunter, Umi, Witch of the Water, the Four-Fathered, the Hidden Separating, Lowercase - @firejay1
Erica (brief mention) - @VocaStar
Genavieve the Navigator, Bane of Norlathel - @Nav
Elle Joyner - @Elle Joyner
Applo, Lord of the Poisonous Trees - @Applo
Tari - @Tarieles
Kimberly - @Kimberlyn
Grene Pod, Lady of the Woods - @Greenie
Tryshtopher - @Turtle of the Tired
Joan D'Dark - @Joan
Holmer Underhill of the Shire - @Holmishire
Jared (brief mention) - @jared555
Razzle Dazzle (brief mention) - @Daz
Winter - @Winter
Grumpy - @Grumpy
Eontana Lamprophis, E.L. Anthill, Bringer of Fates - @Eruantien
Ano Taku - @An Otaku
Rose Dragon, Rose - @Rosedrachen
Diana Buttershifter, Butter Dragon - @Buttercorn
the kraken - @ze_kraken
Felton - @Fel of the Eternal Forest
Gwazi Daharrin, Gwazi the Unusually Large - @Gwazi Magnum
Ink-arnate (brief mention) - @Inkarnate
Mika Starglimmer - @Starlighter
Prince Na'hc Oushiz of the Kingdom of Amore - @Shizuochan
Tywyll Niran - @darkflames13
Fish - @Fish
Eliana Imera, the Dreamer - @DayDreamer
the Cyan Knight (brief mention) - @Cyan
the Mother Melon (brief mention) - @Melonious
Sen, Lady of Demons (brief mntion) - @Sen
Asmodeus (historical mention) - @Asmodeus
 
Last edited:
  • Bucket of Rainbows
Reactions: Pahn and Greenie
Prologue - Chocolate Dogs Tell No Tales (they can try, but….)

The stars shone brightly in the night sky over Iwaku. Dark, silent pine trees reached for those spots of light with their spindly fingers, an ominous backdrop to survey. Six extremely magical teens stood in front of the forest, huddled together over a very very old piece of parchment, a small Yorkshire terrier at their feet. At least… it looked like a Yorkshire terrier. But never mind that. One of the teens pulled out their smartphone and made as if to turn on the flashlight function, but the one beside them snatched it out of their hand with a hiss.

"Don't do that, Ricey. It's a very old piece of parchment with a prophecy on it. Modern technology could make it crumble or something."

No, as I was saying, I have lots of extra copi-

"Jorick just told me if we lose that piece of paper, we'll never figure out how to stop the pandemic." The hisser was a girl, pushing brown bangs out of her face as she squinted more closely at the piece of parchment.

The others around her were listening attentively, as if no one else could hear the strange voice in her head from this "Jorick." Which, of course, they couldn't.

"Are you sure that's what he's saying, Nemo?" The only boy of the group rumbled in his deep, velvety tones. He was looking at the girl with some level of suspicion, though the tilted edge of one lip suggested he was fond enough of her.

"Of course it is, Asta." The girl retorted, without the slightest hesitation. The dog at their feet gave a little yap and jumped a couple times.

"What is he saying now?" Kitti was the oldest of the group, but her childish features and the way she curled that light blonde hair around her fingers made her look the youngest. Her voice was so soft and quiet, almost a little anxious, matching her big, beautiful grey eyes. Everyone gave her an anxious glance when she spoke, though, as if somehow afraid of hearing her voice.

Everyone looked to Nemo. Nemo looked at the… dog. We need to gather the citizens of Iwaku, Nemo. The pandemic will only affect us for now, but if even one of the Iwakuans leaves the city, it could affect the people of the outside world. All of them. We may be young, but we are the new rulers of Iwaku. If we say they have to come, they'll come. The pandemic has to stay a secret, though. Only our circle of volunteers can know about it. Make up a reason, if you have to, but gather them all.

"Jorick says we need to hold a writing camp carnival. Mandatory attendance." Nemo turned to the rest of them, face straight. "But we should only tell our direct underlings about the pandemic. If anyone else finds out, it's going to be chaos."

"Our underlingggs?" asked Pahn, eyes dreamy. Her bowl-shaped bob bobbed (as bobs do) up and down with the rest of her. Even her horns seemed to be quivering in excitement. Peregrine gave her a sideways look, fluttering her wings uncomfortably.

"Yes." Nemo still didn't seem particularly perturbed by anything that was being said. "Now, come on. We have to go. This is going to take forever to set up and we've only got..." she squinted at the parchment again, "I can't tell if that's twelve days or three days, so we should assume it's three, just to be safe. Besides, we can't read any of this in the dark, and if the trees get any closer, they're going to crush us. Remember, the trees mean pandemic. Pandemic means-"

"Yes, we all know what it means, Nemo." Peregrine interrupted uneasily. "Now, if we're going, we'd better go." The girl stretched open her long, grey wings and was the first to take off, far away from the trees and towards the light of the towering white city in the distance. They had a lot to take care of, and very little time to take care of it. At least according to Nemo.

The others turned and began to follow suit, albeit on their own two feet. All except for the dog, still too close to the shadows to be seen properly. He appeared to be looking up at the forest behind them. The lone boy was the only one to notice, and paused, frowning at the dog. "Nemo, wait. What's the matter with him?"

The most unreliable of translators looked over at her charge. He looked back at her. The Dark Gods of Iwaku are returning. He told her, solemnly.

As per her role as unreliable translator, the brown-haired girl gave their token male an unreliable answer. "He says that he wants a ride, because his legs are too short to walk there himself. And he's okay if you take a bite out of him as payment. He is made of chocolate, after all." With the chocolate dog yapping swear words only she could understand, and Astaroth again loudly questioning if that translation was accurate, Nemo ran off laughing. They really did have a lot to prepare, but might as well take her fun while they were at it.
 
Chapter 1 - The Breaking of Wind

Madelyn Wren was scribbling furiously with a long, elegant quill pen, clearly intent on getting her words onto the page. Ink was starting to stain her fingers, and there were streaks of it on her face where she'd clearly attempted to push her hair back. She didn't seem to notice any of those, though, and was likewise ignoring the increasingly heated back-and-forth going on behind her. The door to her simple room was wide open, and several other tenants in the building had stopped by to peek at her two guests, far less tolerant of the noise than she was.

"My dear Mareesah, do you really not understand the implications of your misuse of accurate sentence structure in expletives? Should we fail to correct it now, you may be afflicted with your inadequacy for the rest of your life." This condescending statement came with an equally condescending voice, spoken in the most obnoxious caricature of a gentleman's accent anyone could hope to manage. It well matched the man who spoke it, whose whole being screamed condescension, from his cocky smirk to the gloved hands resting atop his perfectly folded legs. Handsome would not have been an accurate word for him, but he had the sort of impossibly perfect posture that oozed a careless confidence. Most people would've been cowed by the short and very angry woman in front of him, for she was carefully wrapping some leather around her right fist as though getting ready to plow it into his face, but Baelishes didn't really come with survival instincts.

"It's MUH-RIHS-SUH, you twat peddler. Why do I do this job......?" She stayed intently wrapping her right hand, and let out a slow, controlled breath.

"Twat peddler!? Do you even know the meaning of your own words?!" The man gave her a look of mock horro- mocking horror. "I am egregiously offended. Indeed, I am outraged!" The grin on his face immediately following that statement negated everything he had just said. "Are you suggesting I am a flesh peddler! A dirty trafficker of humans and female genitalia!?"

Marissa started at the accusation. "What?! No! Where the-"

She was interrupted with a chuckle. "And this, my dearest Mareesah, is why you should choose your derogatory epithets with a little more care."

The woman left off wrapping and pressed both palms against her eyelids, letting out a half-grunt, half-scream of frustration. "Oh my GODS give me patience."

"Ah. You see, the placement of your comma in that sentence is also extremely important, because I did not hear one. By that, do you mean "Oh my, comma, gods give me patience," such that "oh my" is an exclamatory remark, and suggesting that gods give you patience or that you are asking the gods for patience? Do you mean "Oh my gods, comma, give me patience," with "oh my gods" being the exclamation while you ask for patience from no one in particular? Or did you perhaps mean "Oh, comma, my gods give me patience" where "oh" is given as a replacement for "I understand" or "yes that is correct," and "my gods give me patience" acts as a straight statement informing me that your gods literally give you patience? Though, I wasn't aware that you had gods. The gods are not generally considered as belonging to anyone."

"NONE OF THOSE." She brought her right fist up and literally shook it at him. "I was actually speaking a different language. It doesn't use commas, and the translation of what I actually said was, "Shut the fuck up, or I'll beat the shit out of you and dump you in Grene's Bay."

Before the Baelish she was arguing with could make a reply to that statement, a high-pitched voice squealed excitedly through the open doorway. "Oooooooooooh. Is it a murder?! Is it?! Can I watch?" A short, chubby girl popped her head around the door frame, eyes shining with excitement. Her disturbing tone of voice aside, she was rather eye-catching for how she had chosen to interpret "flaming red hair." Upon first glance, anyone would have thought a small flame was popping out of the top of her head, but closer inspection revealed the small flame to be in the perfect shape of a bird: a blue jay. "Grene's Bay is just so- so lovely. The mossy sand and eel-infested acid swamps are so homey and delightful and-" The girl was off in dreamland. Marissa Kellenghan forgot all about being angry and stared. The malfunctioning Ego she had chased into this apartment got up from his seat on Madelyn's bed and attempted to sidle away from her while her attention was finally, fully diverted, but she collared it without a second glance.

She began slowly. "Who are- Oh wait, no. That bird on your head-" Recognition dawned in her eyes, even as she forced her charge back into a sitting position. "It's been a while, Anya."

"Hmm..." The chubby redhead tapped a finger against her chin, musingly, "And you are...?" The other woman's grip on the man's collar tightened. "I'm just kidding, silly! No one besides you would bother to take care of Spinach's asshole clones. It really has been a while, Rissssssa." She dipped a little curtsey in a frivolous declaration of war, but refused to allow the other woman a response. "But never you mind me. I'm here for my Mood, thank you very much, so you're a nuisance and should leave now. Toodles and noodles!" A snap of her fingers called forth gigantic, snake-like noodles that swayed a bit in the air, then dove for Rissa and the Baelish.

"Oh fuckfuckfuck." Marissa turned around and grabbed the Baelish protectively before roaring, "CHARIOT OF SPACE." The two of them were gone before the burning noodles could get close. Another snap of "Anya's" fingers, and the noodles were gone again, leaving the apartment peaceful and empty.

Anya surveyed the empty space where they'd been, a finger pressed to her grinning lips. "Perhaps I went too easy on her. It doesn't seem like she's gotten any faster. That won't do at all. If she doesn't have all of the Baelishes fixed and ready to play by the end of the night, she'll ruin eeeeverything." She giggled. "But my, they're still so cute. Did you see them? She hugged him. And he liked it." Though there was no one else in the room, and Madelyn had remained oblivious and absorbed, it was almost as though someone replied to her. She paused, then went, "Oh yes! You're right!" Turning around with a little flouncing step, she draped herself on top of the still-oblivious writer. "Moooooooody. Time to wake up now." The quill was plucked from Madelyn's fingers, and she jumped.

She turned her head to awkwardly peer up at the girl atop her, blinking up at her owlishly. "You're..... Cherilyn?"

"Guess again!" Anya danced away and folded her hands behind her back so the ink-stained woman could take a good look at her.

Madelyn stared at her for a moment. "Lowercase...?"

"YYesssu!" The short girl gave a delighted clap. "Do you like my form, today? I picked it special just for you!" She twirled for effect. "Doesn't it look exactly that Hobbit friend of yours? We're off to a carnival, and I've picked you as my date today!" She giggled again and touched a finger to Madelyn's nose. "I knew you'd forget, silly goose. Today is the day of the MANDATORY carnival. I've been rounding up all the no-shows, and you're the last one! Your Shireling friend will join us when she's finished with a little job the Imperatores have assigned to her. Now off we go, m'dear!"

Madelyn blinked wide and opened her mouth as if to speak, but then stopped herself and smiled indulgently at her friend-in-a-friend. It was hard to tell if she knew what this carnival was at all, but she seemed used to the person in front of her. She obediently let Anya link arms with her and drag her away with a "Chariot of Spacey-wacey-thingamasomethingbubbles!" A simple chariot of some kind of dark matter swooped underneath them and whisked them away too quickly to be seen. Their journey through the folds of space was too short for most people to register, but in that split second, the bird atop the girl's head turned to look behind them, seeing a growing darkness tainting the edges of the mid-space. Unnoticed by Madelyn, the corners of Anya's mouth curled up in a smile that meant trouble for everyone.

He licked me, Nemo. HE LICKED ME.

The carnival that had been put together in less than two days was enormous. There were stalls everywhere, erected by the hundred or so volunteers they had gotten after sending out their hasty announcement. It was a far better turnout than they could have hoped for, but when a thousand people had to choose between being a vendor, being a potentially bored guest, or getting a visit from her, a number of them were bound to pick the first option. Nemo was sitting back in a large and very cushy deck chair outside the food tent. A wooden sign hung around her neck boldly proclaiming that she was "on break," though it was a bit of a mystery what she was on break from. The sunglasses and summer clothes clashed with the ornate, porcelain teapot and matching cup sitting on the coffee table next to her. She picked up the cup with a daintily raised pinky and took an annoying slurp out of it. She didn't bother addressing the chocolate Yorkshire's concern. The past few days had been much too busy for there to be much in the way of complaints, but she had expected this for her first run-in with him since The Lick. She laughed to herself, recalling the mix of surprise and rage Jorick had bellowed when Astaroth had hesitantly licked his side two days prior.

Behind her sunglasses, however, she was watching. She was watching everything. She could see Kitti floating around with a clipboard like the ghost of a wedding planner. She could see inside of Erica's Shrek-smut-art booth in the Star section. She could see Ricey strumming her guitar on the stage they'd set up for entertainment. Everything, it seemed, was going perfectly. "You should brace yourself, Jorick." Nemo said, eyes closed behind her sunglasses. A corner of her mouth twitched slightly up.

As if on cue, a voice screamed, "KYAAAAA!!!!!!! OH MY GODS, THAT IS SO CUTE." Jorick turned towards the voice just in time to get abruptly scooped off the ground and get crushed in a hug. He was unable to see his captor.

Who the fuck is this? He asked nobody in particular. He was not expecting a response from the high-pitched nightmare who had picked him up. It was to his horror that he received one.

A gasp of delight was followed by, "This is SPINACH?! Sophie, why didn't you tell me?! It's me, Spinach! Don't you remember me?" There was no way he did not remember that voice and that nickname.

Gods have mercy. Why is it you two, of all people, who can hear me? Jorick let out small, doggie sigh that smelled of peppermint hot chocolate.

"Obviously it's the special connection the two of us have with you!" Despite the overly cheerful voice, or perhaps because of it, Jorick sensed the lie instantly. He was readjusted in her arms to face outward, but as she was turning him, he saw her flash a mischievous glance at Nemo. She spun on her heels and only then did Jorick realize she had brought a companion. "Isn't he cute, Moody?! This is one of the Princeps Imperatores, Jorick the Separating! He's the Father of the Baelishes."

Only you call them Baelishes. He grumbled. There's no way she's going to-

"Oh!" Madelyn didn't come any closer, but she smiled and gave a bow. "It's nice to finally meet you, Imperator." She looked up at Anya and the two of them shared a giggle. "He's so much more chocolate-y than I expected." Her words were whispered, but still clearly audible.

"I know!" Anaia wasn't even bothering to whisper back. "One of the Imperatrices, Sophie Outis, is here as well. She's better known as Nemo. Soph, Jorie, this is Madelyn Wren. She's my bestest Mood-Maker ever so I call her Moody!" Knowing there would be no reply from either of them, she continued quickly. "We're gonna kidnap Spinach for a bit, kay?" She clearly wasn't actually asking for permission, because the little group took off without waiting for the smallest confirmation. Madelyn, however, did cast a glance behind her, trying to look for the illusive Nemo. Of all the Imperatores, the least was known about this one, and she was starting to understand why.

For a long minute, Nemo simply basked in the quiet of the moment, but there was work to do. The Imperatrix stood, flicking the sign on her chest casually. Three out of twelve. Passing through the wall of the food tent, she headed for the carnival's entrance. To her satisfaction, the gatekeeper reported that everyone besides the ones with "special tasks" had arrived. No sooner had he made that report, than an arrow sprouted from his chest. It was impossible to tell where it had come from, but when Nemo lifted her eyes to the sky, she saw a single, pitch black bird streaking across it. No matter. She would keep an eye on the gate for the stragglers. Those who were already inside had no way of leaving, anyways. Even as she wandered away, she thought of the nine she had yet to see. Yes, everything was going perfectly. She closed her eyes to see everything more clearly and let out a sigh of contentment. There were advantages to being nobody.

Genavieve the Navigator was lost. Her lips were pressed together into a thin, white line and her bushy fox's tail twitched anxiously, but she was trying hard not to show it in front of Elle Joyner. The worst of it all was that Nav, as she was known, knew exactly where they had beached. She also knew why. When they had first run aground, Nav had thought nothing of it. She had been in the captain's quarters, surveying the maps of the places they had explored. They were in uncharted waters, right now. New, unexpected islands rising out of the mist were nothing new. She sometimes expected to wake up one morning and discover they had fallen right off the edge of the world. She sometimes wished they would. Bounding out of her cabin, she had hopped onto the deck, expecting to see the unfamiliar landscape of an exciting new island. Instead, she was greeted with the all-too-familiar sight of her old friend's home. That faint shrieking sound, the forest unnaturally close to the shoreline, the noxious green smoke rising from random pitholes in the beach, the sand so stained with moss it was like a living thing itself - these were all hallmarks of Grene's Bay. Where exactly they were on Grene's Bay, she hadn't the smallest clue, but she knew one thing for certain: she had been returned to her homeland.

"Nav?" Nav turned wearily to face Elle. She had been staring at the bay for far longer than was normal, she knew. "Is everything okay? Should we disembark? I know it looks kind of like Grene's Bay, but-"

"It'is Grene's Bay, Elle Joyner. Call Tari and Kim. The three of us alone will disembark." Her voice was grim, but certain. "Until all four of us are on Iwakuan soil again, The Broken Lady probably won't be able to leave."

"What do you mean?" Elle rarely questioned Nav's orders, but she was a shrewd one. Nav knew that if she wasn't careful, the other woman would notice the true extent of her fear.

Nav gave her a tight smile. "I can't explain everything to you right now, Elle, but go on, fetch Tari and Kimberly. I'm sure Grene is wait'in' for us." Her first mate searched her face for some sign of what this was all about, but in the end, she left to pack some things and inform Tari that they had returned. In the meantime, Nav took the short route. Taking a length of loose rope, she belayed down the side of the ship until her boots sunk into the green sand. Her legs didn't object to the solid ground at all, and she thought she could still feel the familiar sway of the ship when she closed her eyes. This was indeed Grene's Bay. No other piece of solid land felt like this. "You haven't changed, my old friend." The sailor whispered under her breath as she knelt down to run her fingers through the sand. Few others would dare to attempt such a thing, but Nav had been here when Grene's Bay had been born. It wasn't the moss one should fear.

Nav's ears twitched and turned towards the faintest sound. A hiss came curling out from the trees, and she slowly got to her feet, pulling a cutlass from her belt and flipping it once in the air. She caught the weapon deftly and brandished it at the forest. "Aye. That's right, you. It's Nav. How many years has it been since we last fought? We all know how this ends, so come on out a'rready and let's get it over with. Or are you scared simpering jackanapes, afraid to muss your pretty hair?" The trees burst into life with hollow shrieking noises. How funny that people could ever imagine EELS making this sound, when the trees were the true culprits. Branches lunged for her, and she jumped on top of one with ease. It recoiled so fast, most would have been thrown off, but the athletic woman had one hand gripping tightly onto it well before her feet flew out from under her. She was flying towards the trunk of the tree at a dangerously high speed, hanging from a hostile branch with one hand while holding her cutlass with the other. Things really never got better than this. With a whoop of laughter, the kitsune captain swung herself back on top of the branch, steadying her feet before rising into a precarious standing position. That's right. Closer... closer.... Right before the branch could shrink entirely into the trunk and cause her to smash into it, she leapt off to the side, slamming cutlass-first into the tree right next to them. One of those whispering shrieks turned into an earsplitting scream, but Nav was already moving again. Bracing her feet on the tree bark to either side of the cut, she yanked her cutlass and flipped backwards through the air, curling herself into a tight ball so that the spray of flesh-eating sap that came with it had as little flesh available to chew on.

She landed on her feet and looked up at her towering opponents surrounding her, face glowing with the savage excitement of a pirate. Now, if she could just find... "Nav!" A small girl's scream back on the beach drew her attention, and that of her assailants. Oh shite. One of the trees made the first move, and the kitsune had her sign. As one of its roots sprung from ground and reached for a small, scaly lizard girl standing next to Elle Joyner, Nav bounded from tree to tree, determined to reach him first.

"Wrong opponent, don't you think?" She quipped as she reached the Head of the Tree Nymphs and slammed her weapon at a downward angle into the trunk. The root threatening Tari whipped back in pain, flinging the poor girl into Elle Joyner. As for the tree itself, from where Nav had left her cutlass quivering, a large piece of the trunk detached itself from the main, falling forward and becoming the shape of a man with bark for skin and glowing specks of light for eyes. Nav had her blade at his throat before he could attempt to get up. "Defeated again so soon, Applo. You should have known better than to leave me to your cronies. Now. I'm in no mood for your tricks today. You try anything with my people again and I'll make sure Grene hears about it. We both know why I'm here."

A low chuckle echoed from the entirety of the forest, as hollow as the whispering and the shrieking. "Bane of Norlathel." His voice was rough and inhuman, overlapping with the whispered words of his many companions, but it wasn't his voice that sent the shivers down her spine at that title. "You may think you know why you're here, but only we know the truth." His laughter continued to echo through the trees even as his body sunk into the ground to become one with a root. The kitsune's tail curled tightly, her whole body trembling slightly even as the trees rearranged themselves in a straight line from the beach to Grene's home.

Tari, Elle, and Kimberly approached her worriedly, and she struggled to maintain some semblance of composure. "Are you alright, Nav?" Kimberly asked gently. She and Tari were both quite small compared to the other two, and it was sometimes hard to remember that they had lived for some centuries as well. Immortal children aged so slowly.

With an equally gentle smile, Nav ruffled Kim's soft brown hair. "I'm fine. Those trees are old rivals of mine, but nothin' I can't handle." Applo's tree bumped up a root under her feet in retaliation, but she stepped quickly away from the spot with another little laugh. "How's Tari, though?" She addressed Elle Joyner, here, as Tari was clutching her hand tightly and sporting a large bruise across her face.

"A little stunned." Elle said, not sounding all that worried for someone whose shipmate had just been slapped in the face with a tree. "She'll live. Now come on. Don't we need to see Grene?" The four of them stepped warily through the hungry trees until they reached a small log cabin atop a short hill in an odd clearing. It was hard to say whether or not it really fit into its environment. Everything was rather woodsy, but unlike the spooky forest, this was a neat affair with no signs of overgrowth. All around the little hill was a swampy natural moat, but the carefully constructed bridge across it was the epitome of sturdy and well-kept. This was the home of the Lady of the Woods, there was no doubt about it. Even with her excellent sense of direction, Nav had never been able to find this place without first defeating the Lord of the Poisonous Trees, and all she knew about its location was that it was always situated in the heart of the forest. It still escaped her why Grene had chosen to abandon her life as a fellow sailor after the fall of the First Norlathel thousands of years ago, but she knew Grene had her reasons. She got the feeling today might be the day she found out, and that thought left her staring nervously at her feet as she lead her companions across the bridge to greet the woman she only ever seemed to meet when death was on the horizon.

The door creaked open. "Ho there, Nav the Gator." The kitsune cracked a smile at the old joke, though Elle and the others looked confused. It really had been too long.

"Well if it isn't the fancy Lady of the Woods. Still not given up on that one, pirate scum?" Despite the rumors circulating that the inhabitant of Grene's Bay was a wild, monstrous lady with death in her eyes and a taste for blood, Grene was a short and rather delicate woman with swarthy skin and a kind smile. She also happened to be grinning from ear to ear.

"Come on in. I've been expecting you. Though... the companions are new." Grene leaned a little bit down and inspected Tari's face. "That looks painful. Let me go get something for that while you guys settle down in the living room." She bustled off, every bit as motherly as Nav remembered her to be. She had never exactly been the most intimidating scallywag on the high seas, and most would laugh at her right up until the boards of their own ship grew branches that threatened to crush them. Without even asking if they'd eaten, Grene set some bowls of soup down for the other three, then provided Elle Joyner with a little salve, instructing her how to apply it to Tari's face and any other places that had been hurt. She did not waste any time in pulling Nav aside, though.

The two of them sat alone in the dining room. Grene had brought them two hot mugs of coffee, but they were mostly using it to warm their hands, it seemed. The air felt almost oppressive with anticipation. "So..." Nav started. "What did you call me here for?"

Another short, yet oppressive silence later, the former pirate got her words together. "Thing is... I wasn't the one who brought you here. I don't know who did, except that it has to have been one of the Gates." Hardened fighters like them were not exactly prone to fainting, but Genavieve almost fell out of her chair at those words. This was starting off very, very badly. She should have guessed it was heading in this direction the moment Applo had called her the Bane of Norlathel. "If it had been anyone else, I would have been able to find out who used my summoning spell. It uses the power of the woods, and they can usually tell whose energy is directing them. This time... only a Gate would've been able to pull it off. They used the power of Norlathel, Gen. You know only the twelve or Norlathel himself can use that power, and only in dire circumstances."

Nav let out a heavy sigh and rested her chin against the wood of the table, eyes peering morosely into her mug of cooling coffee. "It's going to happen again, isn't it? We're going to kill him again."

"No." That was not the answer she had been expecting. She lifted her head to look at Grene. "I mean, yes. I think we are, but I think this is the last time. He's going to die again, but this time everything else will crumble down with him."

The fox lady's fist slammed into the table. "What do you mean? Everything? How can everything come down with him? We have tried time and time again to save him, Grene. I have sailed from these shores countless times in the hopes that I'd never see them again, but I somehow always find myself knee-deep in his blood. And now you're telling me what? What else is there to lose?"

"There's been a prophecy." Grene interrupted her tirade quietly. For the third time in so many minutes, Nav felt her blood turn to ice in her veins. Prophecies were worse than Gates. "Whoever called for you wove the prophecy into their spell. They knew I would go looking for the reason you were brought here, and they wanted to send us both a message:

"Twelve gates were built to seal the adversaries away in darkness
Upon the peak of Norlathel, Father Mountain, the pact was made
Twelve Immortals bound their lives and twelve gods wept in grief
But evil never sleeps, and the gates were ever doomed to fail

The gates shall gasp thrice to warn of the horror they shall release
The void shall take form within the crown and silence shall kill
Three great beasts shall slay themselves with hubris and folly
Reason shall shun truth and tear the watcher from the tower

The final gate will speak the final warning and so shall chaos reign
The saviors will follow the red-eyed raven's call
The fool, the monster, the villain, and the beast will rise and fall
And the fate of the world will follow in their wake

The adversaries will take form, stolen or borrowed or made
And the guardians will lack the power to stop their advance
The offspring are torn and divided but still strike fear in cold hearts
But the children must bear the burdens of their forebears in this war

Three visions more foretell the rise of the shadows of old
Destruction incarnate rains fury upon the treasure of the ages
The mountain meets the sea and stands tall, but the sea swallows it whole
Two corrupt seeds sprout dark vines that attempt to choke the sky

Hope lies in the last gift, the gift of blood and sacrifice and pain
Seek the mother of the first to find the grave of the last
The last gift must be forged anew into a key to sever the source
Bone of gods and blood of offspring and knowledge of children combined

Let not an evil heart bear the key lest the Age of Shadows rule forever
Let not a good heart bear the key lest the Age of Nothing swallow all
The lock must open to one pure of cause and free of doubts
For only then shall the twilight of the gods pass in peace and glory.
"

At the end of this recital, Nav had been stunned into silence from which she was not sure she'd ever fully recover. She didn't want to hear it again, but the words were already echoing inside her head repeating themselves over and over again. "I don't know what all of it means and I don't know where exactly it came from, but one thing's for certain, the dark gods are getting out. Not only Norlathel, but all twelve of the Gates will fall. The dark gods will return, and you and I will probably not live to see if the saviors make it."

Neither of them said anything for the longest time.

Grene stared out the window, respectfully looking away as the sounds of Nav's sobs filled the small room.

Both cups of coffee were cold now, little pieces of comfort that no longer offered any comfort at all.

When the Bane of Norlathel left Grene's dining room and faced her oblivious shipmates again, she came out alone. She and Grene had finished the rest of their conversation in mournful solidarity, and her friend had told her she had other things to prepare for now, and would not be able to see them off. In truth, Nav suspected it was done as a courtesy to her, so she wouldn't have to show weakness in front of the others. Whatever the case, the kitsune was grateful. Elle Joyner looked up at her from where she'd been smiling at Tari and Kimberly, and the smile fled from her face. "Nav." She stood abruptly an approached her captain. "What's the matter? What's going on? You look awful."

Nav looked her first mate full in the eyes and lied like she never had before. She lied like her life depended on it. "Don't you mind me, Elle. Just tired, is all. It looks as though we'll have to stay for a bit, though. Sounds like they're hosting some MANDATORY event in the heart of the land. Heh. Landlubbers. At any rate, it's just for one week. Food and lodgin's will be provided for us. Tari, I think, especially needs some rest. Now, I know it'll be weird sleepin' on land again after havin' spent so many years on the sea." She gave a weak laugh. "This happens every time we disembark, you know, but I promise, in a week's time we'll all be back on the ship and headin' back out to discover new lands to the south. We can take the Shape Thief's chariot to this... carnival or whatever it'is, so it's not far to go, neither." Walking a short distance from Grene's little cottage, she held Elle, Kimberly, and Tari's hands softly and called out, "Chariot of Space." But right before the words came out of her mouth, she made the mistake of glancing back over at the cottage, having noticed the motion of the door opening to reveal its owner.

Grene's gaze captured Nav's, refusing to let her go before her silently mouthed words had finished thoroughly smashing the sailor's heart to bits. "I'm sorry, Nav. I'm so, so sorry."

Tryshtopher's turtle-racing stall was the perfect place from which to snoop. It was tucked next to a number of other, regular stalls, but once customers got to betting on the races, they stopped paying much attention to her beyond waiting for the results of the bet and the go signal. That much a golem with her shape could do. She was left free to wander the fair without Nemo tracking her every move. She had slipped a simple cloak over her head, just barely obscuring her eyes. She tried not to draw attention to herself, so meandered as the other guests were, but there was a very specific purpose to her movement. From stall to tent, Tryshtopher inspected every inch of the fair looking for that one person. She had been preparing for this for years. The mandatory event meant there was no way for that woman to escape. After a thousand years, she would finally have her revenge.

Lost in her own thoughts, she was not prepared when someone practically fell on top of her. Her first instinct was to yell, "Hey!" But she stopped herself. Judging from how hard they had collided, the other person must have been shoved into her. Picking herself off the ground, she turned to her accidental assailant. She reached down her hand, and the other person took it to stand up. That was when they saw each other. They both froze like that, hands grasped. Tryshtopher's blood turned cold and her whole body began to tremble. She didn't let go, but pure revulsion adorned her features. "You- You're Joan. Joan. I've been looking for you." Hauling her roughly to her feet, Tryshtopher of the Turtles shoved herself away from this "Joan" and shrieked. "JOAN D'DARK. I'VE COME TO KILL YOU." Her hands flung something out and two gigantic snapping turtles blossomed in front of her. These were no ordinary turtles. On top of the snapping beaks and tough, leathery hide, these were dangerous, destructive, and fast - they were the Turtles' turtles, and no ordinary mortal could stand against them. It was a good thing the opponent was not a mortal at all.

Joan said not a word at first, but a glittering sword materialized in her hand. Most people were running at this point, but Trysh had known Joan would not. Joan had run for too long to stand the humiliation much longer. After a thousand years of running, she jumped at a justifiable chance to finally finish the conflict. She held herself at a ready stance. "A thousand years, Tryshtopher. You couldn't find me for a thousand years and you think you have the strength to beat me now? Just try it. I will cover the ground in your blood."

Trysh grit her teeth and her hands made a forward-shove motion. The turtles pounced. These creatures were fast, but Joan of the Dark was faster. She jumped on top of the first one, swinging her sword in a large arc towards its head. What had at first appeared to be a regular longsword lengthened and thickened until it was twice the woman's size, plenty long enough to slice right through its neck. Its comrade roared at Joan and its head snapped for her. She ran for it, hopping off the edge of the first turtle, just in time to miss the snapping jaws of the second. More, smaller turtles were surrounding her feet, a moving mass impossible to step upon. As the body of the first turtle dissolved, and her cover from the second went with it, Joan made a mighty leap, jumping clear of the smaller turtles. Those of the Turtle Clan could maintain forms like this for hours, while her stamina would run out. In a fight with a member of the Turtle Clan, there was only one thing to be done, and that was to take down the owner. With the large turtle chasing her, the warrior made a beeline for Tryshtopher, speed increasing and increasing as she poured every ounce of her magic into outrunning the deadly construct. Tryshtopher saw her coming, but made no move to defend herself. She was just... looking at her, as if to say, "Come." A shadow of a doubt passed through Joan's mind, but she dismissed it. Her former friend would fall, never knowing the truth of what had happened that day. That was just how things had to be, for no one of the Turtle Clan could defeat a D'Dark. Ever.

Joan made a swift slash at Tryshtopher, but it was avoided by a hair. She raised her sword to take another slash from above and that was when she felt it. She froze, sword still raised above her head, all the turtles behind her suddenly gone, and slowly looked down at her torso. A strange vine had wrapped itself around her legs and made its way up to her stomach. It was so small, and yet so strong. Joan looked up at the second child of the head of the Turtle Clan. She did not have that power. She could not. "This..... Tednise. You can't- What have you done?"

"I used the pride that killed my brother - the pride that is your weakness - to kill you." Her killer announced, voice oddly shaking a little. Joan shook her head mutely. There was no time to tell her the truth. She could already feel the plant feeding off her life force. Before it took Trysh's soul, too, she had to do this one last thing. With one last scream of effort, The last of the D'Dark's drove her fading sword into Tryshtopher's body, giving it her soul and her oath, before crumpling to the ground, now nothing more than an empty body. The beautiful little vine began to wither and little tendrils attempted to spread from the dead woman's body, heading where the food had gone. By the time the starving Soul-Sucker reached Tryshtopher, though, her life force was fleeing, too. Joan's last act had also killed her. Turning painfully onto her back, Trysh ignored the threads attempting to spread across her skin and looked up at the sky. She had known it would happen this way, and was only grateful that none of the other Gates was there to see it. She had no way of knowing that she had been watched from the moment she had left her stall.

Still standing atop the invisible watcher's pole, the Sky's Imperatrix grimaced at the spray of blood staining the ground. She didn't know why Kitti had told her to do this. All she knew for certain was that something was breaking. A loud fart from below diverted her thoughts. How apt that someone was breaking wind the moment she thought of that. The avian shifted her wings a little uncomfortably. She shouldn't be making light of this matter, but as the wind swirled around her from up high in her perch, and the blood below changed color as it dried, she couldn't help but feel that perhaps the wind was breaking after all. Just... y'know, in a slightly more serious manner.
 
Chapter 2 - Bind, Bite, Blind (the Tongue Twister Series for Young Torturers)

The Grand Cliffs of Shosing on the eastern shores of Iwaku rose from the sea as imposing stone monsters. The water below reflected the sky above - a dark, vivid blue that said a storm was coming, though no storms had ever come across the eastern way. The town of Shosing was a thriving little tourist's destination, the last sign of civilization before what was known as 'the barren wasteland bordering Iwaku,' but it was a full three days' walk from the edge of the cliffs. Few were brave enough to make the journey, and those who did never came back quite the same. The cliffs were indeed a barren wasteland, for not even the hardiest plants were foolhardy enough to grow there. Beyond the crashing of the waves, it was a relatively quiet place. Usually.

A scream split the air, loud enough to be heard over even the waves. Neither the cliffs nor the waves seemed to really care, but Cherilyn knew their owner or good friend or resident or whatever the galer she was to them would enjoy their reports. A short, chubby redhead (a repetitive description) had just fallen off the edge of the cliffs. "I HATE FALLING!!!" She shrieked at the top of her lungs to no one in particular, even as she hurtled towards the ground backpack first. Her whole face was scrunched up, but she kept her eyes stubbornly cracked open. Spreading her arms to either side of her, she yelled, "Fearless Golems, Unliving and Undead, make mine the Ladder of Growing Crumbling!" A hodgepodge of objects ripped their way out of her backpack and began streaming towards the cliff face, forming themselves into a crude ladder. She pulled her backpack off her shoulders and into one hand just in time for the backpack itself to go hurtling towards the cliff, taking her with it. She screamed again, this time giving in to the impulse to shut her eyes. Hard rock slammed into her palms, ripping them open. Snapping her eyes open again, Cherilyn Underhill began climbing up the ladder made of sheets of paper, extra clothes, and plastic-wrapped food as if her life depended on it. Which, of course, it did. Even as she climbed, the makeshift structure was falling apart under her fingers, but it made a valiant effort to rebuild itself until she reached the top, where her brother was waiting for her.

Holmer held out a hand to help her up. His boots were firmly glued to the ground with tiny strands of hair and roots, and no wonder; the wind was strong enough to push any visitors off the edge, as it had done with Cher. Cherilyn gripped her brother's hand tightly, watching all her possessions finally give up the fight and dissolve or fall to the sea below. "Ohh....." The disappointed sound slipped from her mouth before she could stop it. "That was my favorite pen." Following her brother's example, she bound her shoes to the ground. "That old hag." She settled her clothes and hair angrily, unconscious of the blood from her palms that only made things worse. "I'm gonna kill her."

"And how are you going to do that?" Holmer asked wryly, smiling a little indulgently at her, as he cleaned her blood off his own palm with a handkerchief. "She's not even supposed to know we're here, much less what we're here to do."

"I said "kill her," Holmi. I don't have to tell her why I'm doing it to kill her." She grumbled back at him, searching her pockets gingerly. He laughed and shook his head. He didn't say aloud that she might have to. The "old hag" in question wasn't easy to kill. A lot of people had tried over the years and the only ones who had ever succeeded had given interesting explanations as their reasons. Cher pulled a small, round piece of metal from her pockets. It was old and tarnished but covered with deep, elaborate carvings randomly curving across the surface. "Those Imperatores better know what they're getting themselves into. I swear she knew exactly what I was going to do today. She bumped into me today. I haven't seen her in over 20 years, and she passes me today of all days IN MY FORM. So creepy. This should do it." She held the small object in her upraised palms, wincing slightly, and wind began to spiral around it, curling into the grooves and causing the piece of metal to raise up off her hands. It rose higher and higher, spinning faster and faster, beginning to glow as it did so until finally, it became too bright to look at. The siblings backed away from the object and the edge of the cliffs, their shoes awkwardly detaching and reattaching to the ground with every step. Holmer kept his eyes shielded from the light, but his sister kept her eyes trained on the cliff's edge, gauging the little ball's distance from the edge. When they were some distance away, Cherilyn gave a loud whistle and ducked. The little ball exploded.

"And what do you children think you're doing?"

A chill went up Cherilyn's spine and she got up and turned slowly. That specific voice may not have been familiar, but she instinctively knew who it was anyways. A woman was standing behind them, made totally of water. Her arms were crossed across her chest, and despite her form being a little less than stable, she had an undeniably unimpressed look plastered on her face. It took a couple sticky steps for the short girl to turn all the way around to face the strange apparition, but she was grateful for the extra time to settle her nerves. She looked to her brother for support, but he had frozen in place, crouched down defensively and back still to the water-woman. Judging from the odd stiffness of his body, he was not frightened, but had been physically frozen in place. She was on her own, then. "I-" Her voice cracked loudly and her cheeks flushed as red as her hair. Once again the woman's watery form defied all logic, non-existent eyebrows raising derisively. It would have made the young Immortal angry had she not been so utterly terrified of the person making the expression in the first place. "I need to talk to you!" She squeaked, jabbing a finger in the woman's direction.

"UGH." The woman 'rolled' her eyes, then rolled her entire body to one side, the water curling fluidly into a ball out of which eight, spindly legs grew. A large spider the size of a horse now towered over the redhead. "That much was obvious from your little trinket back there. Even those foolish mortal foreigners know you cannot destroy an entire cliff with a small explosion, and your people, of all the clans of Immortals, must have stories of what guards Anaia's cliffs. Now state your business or leave." Her voice was clear and strong and very bored.

Several seconds passed before the hobbit found her voice. "My name- Is Cherilyn Underhill of the Shire." The spider rolled onto its back and began twitching its legs dramatically, as if in the throes of death. She had come with a prepared message; it wasn't her fault! "And I have come as a representative of the new Imperatores of Iwaku to challenge the-" A loud snore emanated from the monster in front of her. "ch-challenge the- the allegiance to the former rulers in preparation for dark days ahead and against the powers of the Original. Bloodthirst of the Hidden Separating, Rage of the Fo-"

"How do you young ones live with the boredom you so liberally provide in your worthless little lives?" The spider rolled back onto its stomach, legs splayed to either side at an angle not at all natural to spiders. Cherilyn could have sworn its eyes were closed, but that was still a bit difficult to tell. Could spiders close their eyes? (Nope.) "Every new set of rulers, whatever they want to call themselves, uses the exact same wording. Besides the dark days and the wanting me to keep it a secret from my Original. Let me make this very simple for you. Tell me what these fancy Imperawhatsits want me for without the pointless ceremony, or I will eat you before you finish it." That silenced Cher instantly, and she stood there, mouth gaping and body quivering. "Oh look at that, the poor dear is so scared. How cute. Or it would be if it wasn't so annoying. Come now, child. I was not made with very much patience, and I haven't had a decent kill in years. Don't give me a reason."

She panicked, blurting out the first things that came to mind now that her carefully prepared speech was ruined. "They say you have to go back! They didn't tell me everything, but they said you have to force-merge with her before the carnival is over! I don't know, okay!? Something about some plague and th-the end of the world or something, I don't know! They told me to find you, or at least I think it's you, and tell you that they needed Anaia Tsukasa the Immortal Hunter back and that meant theyneededUmiWitchoftheWaterto-"

The spider had hopped back up onto the tips of his legs the moment the words "Immortal Hunter" had slipped from her lips, and by the time her words had started slurring together with her haste, it had slammed her into the ground with one leg, effortlessly breaking the threads tying her shoes to the ground. "SAY IT AGAIN." For the first time during the entire conversation, the voice matched the speaker, monstrous and echoing as though spoken under water. It held not a hint of the bored femininity that had characterized it earlier. With the Embodiment of the Nemesis so close to her face, Cherilyn was having trouble breathing. A hysterical part of her brain noted dully that the leg on her abdomen felt as dry and solid as the voice had been earlier and a high-pitched giggle forced its way out of her throat. A not-so-hysterical portion heard Holmer yelling her name, having been released from the witch's spell when she had charged, and she thought he sounded scared. She couldn't imagine why. Another giggle was bubbling to the surface, but the spider was having none of that and prodded her roughly in the stomach so the laugh turned into a cough. "What did they say they wanted of me? No, who are these Imperatores of yours? Tell me."

"Hey! Get off her!" Holmer yelled, and a bottle of cold tea from his own supplies went flying through the "body of water," slowing down and dropping on top of the woman under Umi. "Oops." He winced to himself, but he didn't have time to lament his choice of weapon because he had gotten her attention. All four of her front-facing eyes were trained on him, but she did not move away from his sister. "I'm Holmer of the Shire, and I know just as much as she does, so you leave her alone!" Holmer stared her down, but this tactic did not seem to be working, no doubt hindered by his shaking legs. "The-re are seven Imperatores." He started off, uncertainly. "Three Princeps Imperatores: Kitti, Jorick, and Astaroth of Galer. The other four are just regular Imperatores... erm... Imperatrices. Their names are Sophie Outis, Brie Rhys, Pahndora de Mie, and Peregrine Falk. What more do you want to know?"

"No wonder she didn't tell me." She muttered to herself, before giving him another look. The spider regarded him silently for a long moment. Then, before his eyes, she melted back away into the form of a woman, sitting cross-legged on the ground in front of his sister. Cherilyn was held to the ground with a thin strap of water. She had lost consciousness. "Holmer of the Shire, do you know why you and your sister fear me without ever having met me before?" She did not give him a chance to reply. "It was to protect you. If you could not help but fear her - fear me - you would know to stay away when you got too close, and if you were caught, that fear would render you unconscious before you could feel pain. It has become rather boring to kill your kind, so listen to me carefully, and then take your sister and go home before you irritate me enough to overcome that boredom: I. AM. RETIRED." Her voice boomed through the cliffs so loudly a few large rocks cracked off and fell into the water. "There is only one reason any Immortals would be allowed among the ranks of Iwaku's rulers, and only one reason those particular Immortals would want the Immortal Hunter back. You go back and tell them I'm not helping them kill anyone until it starts getting interesting again. She'll call me back when she's ready and not a moment sooner." Just like that, a wet and unconscious Cherilyn was flung into his arms, and the Witch of the Water flowed right past him and into the sea.

Holmer would have collapsed to his knees had his shoes not still been stuck to the earth. His shaky legs gave way anyways, and he fell on his butt, holding onto Cherilyn by some miracle. He was not really certain what most of that had meant, but he knew the two of them had made a narrow escape. He also knew they had to return to the Shire before joining the Imperatores at the carnival. Something she had mentioned worried him. There were never Immortals among the rulers. Were there?

"The dragons are coming, the dragons are coming! Or so the Reverand said. The funny thing, is what he brings - he doesn't have his head." A Baelish intoned loudly to a backdrop of angry yelling and manic laughter. As a general rule, Baelishes refused to sing, but a couple were prone to a little poetry so long as it made absolutely no sense and rhymed enough to get on Marissa's nerves. A group of more than ten, identical men were strapped down into what looked very much like baby seats and looking not the least bit embarrassed about it. They were in a small and somewhat dusty workshop with rather poor lighting, despite the hot sunlight attempting to invade through the crack under the door. Faint sounds of many feet and excited discussion could be heard from outside, but that wasn't where the yelling was coming from.

A wrench thunked into the offending Baelish's head, followed by a shout. "WHAT THE GALER IS A REVERAND, NUMBER SIX? HEY. YOU. Number Fourteen, STAY STILL." Marissa was running around the workshop, frantically chasing a man making a break for the door. She full-body tackled him and clapped a palm over his forehead. He stilled as she did so. "I am not a babysitter. I am not a babysitter." She muttered to herself, chanting it as if she could make it true simply by saying it. She wished it was true, but it was getting harder and harder to think that with any conviction lately. Her palm still over his forehead, she began sifting through the powers Jorick had distributed into this one, spreading out haphazard memories and personality traits into a more balanced individual, making a few physical and magical tweaks as well. For reasons she still could not understand after years of working with them, Jorick's many Egos tended to suffer from some kind of personality entropy. Bits of the personality would start being triggered by random actions, more subtle traits would suddenly become obscenely prominent, and at times they would swap traits amongst themselves, as if it brought them some amusement to turn one into a axe-wielding murderer while the rest became the most benign little creatures in the universe. For a short amount of time, anyways. She had consulted Umi once about this problem, but the apparition had told her that Separated Beings were no more unstable than their Originals, and since Jorick the Separating was not known for sudden shifts in personality, it was likely intentional. As much as she hated to admit it, "asshole clones" was a morosely accurate description.

"Marissssa, daaarling." The two words were stretched out in a sickeningly sweet manner, voice rich and oily. She turned around and let go of Number Fourteen, having just finished the procedure on him. Maintenance knocked them out for several minutes, so she was safe from attempts to escape for a bit.

She scowled. "What do you want, Number Eight? Sit back down. It's not your turn yet." Number Two and Number Four were the last ones remaining before Number Eight, but she always left Eight for last. She wasn't worried about his trying to escape, he wasn't really like that, but out of all of them he was, in some sense, the most difficult to deal with. She attempted to haul Number Fourteen over to the row of baby seats holding the others, but Number Eight took her hand and knelt down in front of her on one knee, causing her to drop Fourteen.

"How can I bear to stay still when I see your beautiful body atop another man?" He asked, leaning forward to kiss the back of her hand. His voice sent shivers up Rissa's spine, and her knee snapped upwards to collide with his face, causing his head to snap backwards. Unfortunately, she had yet to find anything effective against this one. "Ah, the violence of your love always strikes me to my core." He took her hand again, ignoring the blood dripping from his nose.

Slightly overwhelmed with a now all-too-familiar sense of nausea, Rissa snatched her hand away from his and planted her foot on his neck, pressing him to the ground that way. "There is no 'violence of my love,' Eight. JUST VIOLENCE. You're getting maintenance early." Refusing to give him the satisfaction of making skin contact with him, Rissa held her palm above his head and projected her powers instead.

A knock on the door a moment later grabbed her attention. "Marissa? Are you almost done? The Baelish-led LARP is about to start, and we need a few of them to help with something that's cropped up." A sweet, soft voice asked. It was not shouted, so by rights it should've been difficult to hear through the door, but it floated in clearly. It had to be Kitti.

"Two more left!" She bellowed back, as she pulled Fourteen and Eight into their respective seats. It wasn't long before Two and Four joined them. Setting a chair backwards in front of them, Marissa stared them all down menacingly as they chatted amongst themselves, waiting until all twenty one were awake and paying attention. "Okay, all of you. I want you to behave for the next week, got it? That's all you've got to do. Just don't cause any trouble for ONE WEEK. I know you all do that crap on purpose, but I promise you, if you just behave and do your jobs properly for this one week, I will do as much maintenance on you as you want once it's over, okay? I've given you all some upgrades because Peregrine told me there might be trouble, so you're all a little more resilient to magic and have had some physical tune up done, but don't be reckless." She wagged a finger at them like a disapproving mother. "That doesn't mean you're indestructible. You also have to be careful that you don't hurt anybody else because you UNDERestimated your strength. I am going to be busy this week, so you all have to be on your best behavior. I know it brings you some kind of fucked-up glee to see me pissed off, but even if you cause trouble I won't be able to help you. HEY. YOU LISTENING TO ME?" She snapped her fingers in front of one whose attention seemed to be wandering. "I'm going to let you all go free in a minute, but you have to be good. I'm serious."

She glared them down, and they looked at her with expressions ranging from bored to smarmy. "Yessir, message received, sir." Five chirped in a goofy accent. He had somehow mastered the art of causing his eyes to wander in different directions. It was, in her opinion, rather creepy, but completed the overall look splendidly.

With a heavy sigh, Marissa hit a button, releasing them from their restraints all at once. They sprung up and brushed themselves down, a couple adjusting their mustaches. "You all just be careful, okay?" Rissa said softly. It wasn't a command so much as a wish.

She shook her head and wiped her hands on a small dishcloth, expecting them to leave immediately, but the silence corrected her and she looked up to see them all standing in that small room looking at her. Twenty-one pairs of identical dark eyes watched her from underneath heavy brows, and she thought the set of their faces seemed a little sad. The 21st Ego stepped forward, and for the first time in his existence, his face and voice were completely serious. "This was the last time, Marissa Kellenghan, Friend to the Separated, Keeper of the Scales, Dismantler of Wars, Only Creation of the God of Balance. We thank you for all you have done. May you survive the days to come, Fifth Gate of Norlathel." Number Twenty-One touched the tips of his fingers to his lips, then laid his palm out in front of her in an ancient gesture of respect. As if they had rehearsed it, all of them bowed to her simultaneously before turning and walking out the door into the busy lanes of the festival. The dishcloth fluttered to the floor as she stared after them in shock.

Nobody on the streets noticed the little drama that had just happened in the workshop. The Egos were here! Despite their reputation for being annoying and purposely insufferable, the Baelishes were very well-received among the populous of Iwaku. Most people had decided they were fun, and where better would they fit than in a carnival where the strangest of things could happen. While three of the Baelishes headed off to start the LARP, the rest scattered to act as peacekeepers and helpers. A whopping eight of them were relocated to cordon off a sector of the carnival where a couple people had died unexpectedly, but the rest were distributed evenly between the Star sections and the regular sections, except for one that had decided it wanted to start auctioning samosas for reasons no one questioned. Questioning a Baelish was not something one did if you liked your sanity.

Though officially the carnival was a "Writing Camp Carnival," it ran more like a carnival crossed with an arcade. Some booths held contests. Astaroth of Galer's booth, for instance, was a regular balloon-popping game, while a dwarf by the name of Jared ran a math tournament. Winning a contest would give the player a voucher to feed into a ticket machine that would print a certain number of tickets. On the other hand, tickets could be spent at other booths. Some provided art or figurines, but there were more unique booths as well, such as Pahndora's shipping booth, where she would predict a character that would ship well with one of your choosing. Food required regular money, while certain events were completely free, including the "Baelish-led LARP," Razzle Dazzle's Ferris Wheel of Endless Sparkles, and the musical numbers performed on an open stage. Upon entry into the carnival, every member had been given a wristband. These wristbands held several functions, though most of the members were unaware of certain things those wristbands could do. The first was to prove that they were a citizen of Iwaku who had been authorized entry. The second was to automatically determine their age. The part of the carnival known as the Star Section was only open to those who had passed a certain age, depending on species. Those allowed to enter would have a star pop up on their wristband that, when tapped to a machine, would allow one through the gates. These also served as identification tags for lodging, as every citizen of Iwaku had been assigned rooms on the edge of the carnival - little tent cabins complete with cozy firepits outside. Beyond that, however, the wristbands tracked the locations of every member of Iwaku throughout the entire day and periodically checked for signs of the pandemic. It had been a nightmare to enchant all of them.
(This has been your complementary service announcement in the form of excess exposition for the chapter. We hope you look forward to more excess exposition in the extras.)

"WHO LIVES IN A PINEAPPLE UNDER THE SEA?" Roared Number One. An enormous foam sword popped into his hand seemingly from nowhere and he shook it in the air like it was a mighty battle-axe. The nearest children gave gasps of laughter, though no one knew what the answer to that nonsensical question was supposed to be. He swept his fake sword out to point at random members of the audience. "Will you join us on our grand adventure, brave ones? Deep in an ancient cave on the far reaches of Iwaku, people from another land have come! Take upon you the mantel of our ancestors and join me to fight these strange invaders!" His voice boomed through the carnival, drawing curious onlookers.

It was a welcome distraction. Kitti tapped the top of her clipboard with the back of a pen impatiently, not even looking at the two dead women at her feet. Most everyone else had given the area a wide berth, but Galer was the home of the Soul-Sucking Weeds. Any of its residents could tell you infusing the surrounding area with a little death magic would cause even the seeds to wither. The plants weren't long-lived without the health of others. It did not cross her mind that the stench of death might be the primary reason everyone else was refusing to step within the barrier of yellow tape the Egos had set up. "Peregrine. Do you know where Jorick is?" Astaroth was busy tracking down the witnesses and erasing their memories before they could spread rumors about the strange fight, but Kitti had not seen the third Princeps Imperator all day.

"No, Ma'am." Peregrine said stiffly from where she was standing, some ways back from Kitti.

Kitti sighed. "Oh well. It was worth asking." She looked down at Joan and Tryshtopher, pressing her lips together unhappily. This development was not unexpected, but it was a bad way to start things off. It had taken Tryshtopher less than a day to kick off killing within the carnival. There were days she was heartily glad she was not an Immortal. She was not even certain what had started the feud between the Turtles and the D'Darks so many years ago. The Turtles had historically been reputed to be a peaceful clan, but word on the street was that the last Turtle had been trying to kill Joan D'Dark for over a hundred years. No one except the two of them seemed to know why.

"Ahem." Kitti turned in the direction of the loud cough to see a frosty snowman of a woman standing mere inches from her. Peregrine jumped in surprise and flinched forward for half a second, but it was just Winter, one of the four Season Generals. "Empress."

"It's Imperatrix now, Winter." Kitti corrected, smiling.

"It is still General Winter, Empress." The ice sculpture retorted without skipping a beat. "His Grace would like me to inform you that the witnesses have been contained." From where she stood, ice had begun to spread in a thin sheet over the ground. "He also discovered the gatekeeper-"

"Discovered?" Peregrine interjected. "He should be-"

Winter ignored her, as always. "Is dead. The White Ravens left a calling card."

"The White Ravens?" Peregrine once again fought to join the conversation, fluttering her grey wings in agitation. The conversation was getting farther and farther away from her, and dead gatekeepers impacted them all. She wished some of the other Imperatores were here. She rarely felt as if she was really fit to be one of them, but especially so when Winter came and treated her like a child.

It was Kitti who answered this time. "They're a group of bandits, Pere. Really, General, you should answer questions when addressed. Peregrine is also an Imperatrix of Iwaku and therefore your superior." Her tone was light and cheerful, but both of the other women stiffened instinctively at the sound of the tinkling laughter that followed her words.

Winter bowed to Kitti, but didn't bother to hide an annoyed sigh. "The White Ravens are seven dwarves, led by the dread bandit Grumpy. They ride astride giant birds and terrorize travelers wandering through our sacred lands of Galer. We have not seen them since we chased them into the Helde Hills a decade ago. An invitation here was not extended to them. Their calling card is a feather of the bird they ride on." She held up a large black feather that had clearly been in her possession for some time now, as it was covered with a thick layer of frost.

Peregrine took it gingerly, casting a glance at Kitti. "Ravens... They could be-"

"That's not a raven's feather." Winter interrupted yet again. "It's a blackbird's feather. They ride blackbirds."

"Blackbirds." Peregrine blinked at her, uncomprehending.

"Yes. The ones with the yellow beaks." Winter watched her, waiting for her to catch on.

"...And they're called the White Ravens." The Imperatrix did not think this objection was a stupid one, no matter what face Winter was making at her. "And you're sure this feather is a calling card and not just a random feather dropped by a large black bird?"

"Of course it is. Giant blackbird feathers are unmistakable." Winter snapped at her. Peregrine had lived around people with various types of wings for as long as she could remember, and there was not a single thing about the feather in her hands that made it even slightly unique, much less 'unmistakably a giant blackbird's feather.' Still, arguing with Winter was like arguing with a child who thought it was an adult - a description that summed up their entire relationship - so she didn't bother. She turned to Kitti instead. "But you don't think the White Ravens could have anything to do with the red-eyed Raven in the prophecy?"

Winter wasn't done with her, though. "None of them have red eyes, and would it not be strange for the prophecy to be talking about a literal red-eyed raven? Ravens do not have red eyes. Neither do dwarves."

"So you think we should look for a non-literal raven?" Pere shot back, flabbergasted. "What if there are new members of the White Ravens? What if they are now riding actual Ravens? How do you even know what they look like after ten years of isolation? What are you looking at?" The Avian gave a harsh sigh. Winter was looking above her head, looking as though she'd lost interest in the conversation.

Winter looked back at her and pointed a finger straight upwards. "They look like that." She grunted, taking a step back.

"What?" Peregrine tilted her head to look up, but before she could get a good look, an enormous black bird slammed into the ground in between the two of them. She yelped and hopped backwards, wings flapping frantically.

"And that." Winter added, pertly. Exactly as she had described, the bird flapping around for was an enormous blackbird with a yellow beak. It matched the feather Peregrine was still clutching in both size and color. A short, very angry looking man with the classic dwarf's beard and rough skin staggered off of its back, swearing profusely. His clothing was made of some kind of short fur, so he looked a bit like an ugly bear cub with a bow on its back. "That one is Grumpy, former general of Galer, and my boss before I deposed him." Winter announced drily.

She stretched a hand towards him palm out, as if to blast him with a little ice magic, but he held up both hands, coughing slightly. "Now hold on." His voice was rough and gravelly. "I didn't fall out of the sky for fun. I got knocked out." He pointed up at the sky in the direction of the gate. "By them." If it was meant to be a distraction, it worked. Kitti, Winter, Peregrine, and the Baelishes all turned to look where he was pointing. At first it appeared to be nothing more than a dark cloud on the horizon. Baelish Number Six was the first to recognize the dark shapes growing bigger and bigger as they grew closer. He shook his head and laughed aloud.

Reverand or no, it turned out the dragons were coming, after all.

Grene felt odd, taking a casual stroll through the forest with Applo during such a critical time. It was definitely necessary, but it was so peaceful. It didn't at all feel like the end of the world was coming, and she felt a little guilty at being able to enjoy herself when so much was happening. They were searching for cure to the plague, not going on a picnic. She tensed up slightly. As if sensing her thoughts, Applo placed one hand on her shoulder. She looked back at him and felt herself relax. The dryad's bark-skin and glowing-coal-eyes may not have been comforting to most, but he had been Grene's foremost friend and protector for far longer than most history books went. The same was true of the forest in general. The forest of Grene's Bay had once been known as the Wandering Forest, because the trees had enjoyed wandering everywhere but the Dreaded Cliffs. Their nomadic ways had terrified the mortals of Iwaku thanks to the damp darkness and dank smell of decay that came with them wherever they went. The creatures that had wandered with the forest were fierce and carnivorous, as well, befitting a forest where the trees themselves were fierce and carnivorous. To Grene, all of this simply meant home. She pressed her own hand to Applo's and smiled in silent thanks for his presence, before slipping back into work mode.

Her eyes wandered about the forest, but she was focusing on the feel of magic rising from the land. It was an ability unique to her, and she was currently grateful for it. If the Imperatores hadn't needed her to find a cure to whatever this was, she knew she would be in the carnival at the moment. Her horrifying reputation often left her wanting for companions, but she didn't think she was prepared to deal with the entire population of Iwaku's capitol city, much less that of almost the entire continent. In retrospect, she was also a little grateful she hadn't had to see two of the Gates die. When one Gate of the Norlathel fell, all the others felt it but Rissa. She had suspected that the Gates would fall one by one over the course of the carnival, but knowing it was going to happen and actually feeling death tug on her soul had turned out to be two very different things. It had happened almost as soon as Nav had left, and Grene worried Nav would mistake the fall of the Gates for simple Chariot-nausea. That would only make it worse when she realized the truth. "Which gods do you think are free?" She mumbled half to herself. Applo did not reply. Trees were not among the garrulous types. Not even trees that could talk. Besides, she knew the answer to that question, and he knew it.

She fell silent for a short pause, scanning the ground obediently for restorative plants or grounds, but she needed to talk. "It was probably them, wasn't it?" Applo again did not respond. She needed to talk. "They used to be such close friends. I don't think Ted would've wanted this, but after that- that thing took him, they never stopped to-" She stopped herself and took a shaky breath. "What if this is how things end, Applo? Nav and I haven't talked in years, the Turtles blamed Joan for everything, and the rest of the Gates...." There was a lot to say about the rest of the Gates, but nothing good. She shook her head and tried to continue her original point. "What if our friendship and our ability to love, our- our humanity itself, was the price of becoming Gates? Sometimes it feels more like we gave away pieces of our own souls than decided to house another's."

"Your question is foolish." Applo's gravelly echo stopped her anxiety spiral in its tracks. "You know the land better than the others who took on Norlathel's burden. Imvadrim is changed by you, but also changes you. She robs you of nothing. She does not ask your humanity of you. She respects it, and that is why you respect her. Your people have lived long, that is all. Are not mortals the same in their regret and guilt?"

Grene stopped walking and looked at Applo with grateful surprise. After a moment, she broke into a little laugh. "You really have changed so much, my dear friend."

Applo's expression did not change at all, but Grene saw the smile anyways. "Imvadrim changes you, but is also changed by you. Did I not say you know her nature best?" She laughed once more and resumed her search. When she had first met him, she could not have imagined the tree-man smiling or saying things like 'Imvadrim respects your humanity.' She had thought him so cold, as others did. Now, she could not imagine what her life as a Gate would have been without him. It had all begun after the fall of the first Norlathel.

~~

"Is your name Grene Pod?" The first time she heard the dryad's voice, Grene thought it rather scary, but she was too busy despairing to be scared. She looked up at the creature standing in front of her, eyes wide and watering. She hadn't moved for what felt like hours, sitting on her knees, cradling Norlathel's body with her eyes frozen open with shock. His blood was all over her clothes and she couldn't feel her legs any more. Her first thought was to wonder if he had come to kill her, but she wasn't sure if she cared.

"Yes." She croaked. She hadn't realized she was hoarse until now, and speaking brought on a coughing fit. The figure reached down and reached under Norlathel as if to pull him up off her, but Grene stopped her coughing to scream. "NO. LET GO. LET GO. YOU CAN'T HAVE HIM." She grabbed the body with one arm, shoving Applo away with the other. "You don't touch him." The dryad backed up, as she wanted him to, but when she looked up again, he had sat down within arm's reach and was watching her. She didn't let go. "You can't have him."

"I can." He retorted, still not moving. "He is one of Imvadrim's children, and his body will be returned to her."

"Who are you?" She searched his face. For the first time, she actually took in his appearance, and the appearance of the area around her. They were in the middle of Galer. The landscape should have been dark red rocks and elaborate cactuses shaped like skeletons. It wasn't known as the Land of the Dead for nothing. Instead of the familiar sight where they had chased down the banshees, she found herself in the only clearing of a jungle so thick it was obscuring most of the sky. Looking up, she saw that the sky had darkened, and she suddenly realized she was cold. "And where am I?"

"You are where you have been. The Wandering Forest has come to you, to retrieve his body." He gestured at Norlathel. "He belongs to Imvadrim."

Grene's eyes widened slightly. "This- this is the Wandering Forest? You're- are you one of the trees? I don't understand. Who is Imvadrim?"

He did not seem bothered by her questions, though everyone she knew would've been impatient with her. "I am Applo, and I am not simply one of the trees; I am the Lord of the Poisonous Trees. Imvadrim is the name we call the Mother Land. She gave birth to all of us that live before your 'gods' came here. I am far older than your kind, Immortal, and the creature you hold in your hands is my brother before he is an Immortal."

"Your- your brother? Then why weren't you here hours ago? Why weren't you here when we were fighting the banshees? Where were you when the Mist took Nav and he took her sword instead of me? He shouldn't have even been here. We shouldn't have been here. We're seafolk. We don't belong on the land. His land."

Applo didn't respond for a moment, and she didn't realize until he spoke that he had been trying to understand her questions in the first place. "What business have I with Norlathel's life? I retrieve his body for Imvadrim. Are you not the creation of the god who, of all your people, was closest to the Mother? We have come because you would not return him to her. You have been given your time to mourn, now return him to us." His voice held not the smallest hint of sadness, nor any respect for her grief. "He was not anything to you to begin with."

The tears spilled down Grene's cheeks as she glared him down, chest heaving with anger. "It's not that he was nothing! He had nothing!" She yelled back at him, ignoring how much it hurt to be talking this much. "How could any of us stand to look at him after everything that happened? We left him because his very existence was the fall of the gods. So we left him all alone and ran. He had no duty to care about any of us, but this is the second time he has given his life for us. Look around. All the other Immortals have left. How can I leave someone who has given everything despite having nothing? He doesn't deserve to be abandoned again, even if he is dead."

At first, he did not speak, but his response came eventually. "You understand very little, human. I do not see the significance of your reasons for holding onto his body, but Norlathel is not dead. Norlathel is the mountain. While it stands, he stands. The shards of his soul you call the Gates of Norlathel keep his mountain alive. He is one with the Mother, so he cannot be abandoned. The land upon which you sit is Imvadrim, and you abandoned her for your seas, but she has always been with him. Return him to her and as long as your feet are upon the ground, you too are with him." He stood up and pulled Norlathel off her. This time, she let him. "And how is it you do not understand that giving everything without having anything is the same as giving nothing?" With a rumble of discontent that sounded like all the trees were making it, he took Norlathel and disappeared with the rest of the Wandering Forest.


~~

Looking back on it, Grene knew he had explained the underlying concept of his life to her because he had wanted her to hurry up and give the body back to him, but it still had changed everything for her. It explained why she had run from the land after the War of the Gods, despite being the God of the Land's creation, just as she had run from Norlathel. A year later, she had made Grene's Bay in a feat of land-making not seen since the gods had arrived. It had taken several years for the Wandering Forest to make it to her new lands and many more for her to convince them to stay with her, but Applo and the whole forest had changed her understanding of Iwaku and her role in it. It had also changed what it meant for the Gates to fall: it meant Norlathel died for good.

"Okay. These should do it." Grene said, taking a handful of earth from underneath the roots of one tree before returning to Applo's side. Under the safety of the trees, they had made their way to the ancient grounds of Imvadris, also known as the Heart of Imvadrim. Most of the trees had stayed back, so it was simply her and Applo's tree standing alone in a wide circle of gravel and stone. Immortals, mortals, and gods alike could not make it to this sacred place without the guidance of one of Imvadrim's children. To Grene, it felt as though the entire area was screaming. Small weeds and saplings were littered around the area, but they were bent into odd shapes or colored oddly. Every once in a while, the ground rumbled to an erratic beat that ought to have been a steady one. She had never been here before, but still she knew what it was and why things were going wrong. If they were going to make a cure, it would have to start here. On a conveniently-placed stone dais, the Immortal began to set out stone bowls and an old mortar and pestle. She rolled up her sleeves and started cooking. They would need enough for the whole population. That meant many hours of cooking for her, but her job was fun, at least.

Nav didn't see the dragons right away, because she was a little preoccupied with throwing up. It was a bit to her embarrassment that she was the only one whose lunch was coming up, but she blamed that on whatever was wrong with the mid-space. The Chariot of Space was a popular mode of transportation because it was fast, but that same speed was known to cause nausea, especially transitioning so abruptly from Grene's ship-like lands. Furthermore, when they had first landed in front of the gates of this festival-thing, she had felt something wrench in the pit of her stomach, like someone had stepped on her ribs and left a couple shards lodged in her heart. Precisely two. Why... precisely?

She didn't have time to wonder much further, as she had barely finished her puking session when Tari lifted her head and asked, "What's that?"

Nav looked up and forgot that her mouth tasted like her insides. "Those are dragons. And we're going."

"Dragons?" Kimberly stared up in open awe. Nav understood her interest. Though she had a human form, the girl was part-Immortal, part-dragon. She couldn't help but be curious about the ancestors she'd never met. She had had the same reaction when she'd first met Nav in the bowels of a slave ship heading out from Iwaku. Tari had always been a little more practical about things.

Eyebrows drawing together anxiously, the lizard-girl turned to the kitsune. "Are they going to attack?"

"I don't think so," the captain responded, giving the sky another glance before shooing them towards the unmanned gates, "but we'd best go inside. Come on, Kim. I know you want to know more, but we don't know what they want." Since the creations of the dragons, Nav had never once seen more than two of them together at one time. It was said they nested in the huge mountains that served as the entrance to the Land of the Dead. Many had ventured into those mountains looking for the rumored treasure that dragons were thought to have stored in their nests, only to find themselves in the domain of the Living Dead. Though Nav herself had never seen these nesting grounds, she had heard directly from the dragon's mouth that whatever gold or silver to be found there was purely coincidental, for it wasn't items of monetary value that drew dragons. Dragon eggs were exceptionally rare. Dragons very rarely mated, and each clutch typically held no more than three eggs, few of which survived. The big problem was that dragons fed off of emotions. As eggs, all dragons required copious amounts of 'feelings of value,' and since eggs could not leave the confines of the mountains, the dragons had had to resort to stealing objects or people who had been highly valued, after the fall of the gods. It was still almost never enough. Nav could not imagine any reason for all of the dragons to band together and leave those sacred grounds. There were some things she didn't want to imagine. She bodily shoved the two young Immortals through the gates to the carnival, not even noticing the dead man on the ground next to them or the wristbands that materialized on their wrists the second they stepped over the threshold.

Elle Joyner noticed. She noticed the wristbands, she noticed the dead man, she noticed the six, frantic blackbirds circling the center of this carnival, and the faint, glowing barrier around the carnival that made it seem as if there was no way out, and most of all, she noticed Nav. Genavieve had been her captain for many years, and the last time she'd had that look on her face, she had disappeared for two months and returned to the Broken Lady with nothing but her cutlass, the clothes on her back, and a haunted look in her eyes. She had been covered in blood from head to toe. It was not a sight Elle wanted to see again.

"Hmm... who are you?" The voice came out of nowhere, and very literally out of nobody. Elle had been paying attention, but no matter how she turned, she could not see the source of the voice. "You seem like the good-student type. What are you doing with Nav?" Searching was doing Elle no good, and she felt like a fish in a tank, being observed and evaluated by a higher power. In the face of such a thing, she could not find the words to reply. The voice didn't really seem to require or desire a response. "People are coming, by the way. Heads up."

As far as Elle could tell, Nav hadn't noticed her conversation with the invisible person, attention split between the dragons behind them and the awe-inspiring sight of the bustling carnival. As the invisible person had said, five people were converging on them. Two men from the heart of the festival, one intimidating fortress of a man not far from the dead guy, and two women rushing out with their eyes on the skies. The larger man reached them first and his eyes flicked over at something right past Elle for a moment, but then he turned his focus on the four of them. "Welcome, Immortals of the Far Seas. We were told you would be arriving late. I am Astaroth, former Duke of Galer, and one of the current Princeps Imperatores of Iwaku." They'd never been called 'Immortals of the Far Seas' before, but it was an accurate descriptor, she supposed.

Nav was already opening her mouth to reply, hopefully to tell the scary dude to relax a little, but one of the other two men approaching reached them and pounced. "NAV!" The odd individual was a relatively short human with odd, bright-blue hair, and he was followed by one taller than him with white hair and somewhat shifty eyes. The other was not quite so enthusiastic in his greeting, but Elle caught him sharing a glance with Nav and offering her a respectful dip of the head.

"Hey! Who are you?" Kimberly demanded, trying unsuccessfully to pry the blue-haired one off of her respected captain.

"That is-" Astaroth tried.

The man peered down at Kim from his place in Nav's arms and announced with an odd lilt to his voice, "E.L. Anthill is what most people know me as, but if you look at the people coming from over there," he pointed at the two women, "and over there," his finger moved over to point at the blackbirds in the sky that were not actually coming towards them, "and over there," and now he was acting as if probably-invading dragons could or would introduce themselves, "that's a stupid lot of introductions about to happen in a stupid short amount of time. Ya might want to wait until everyone's here." At least that wouldn't take that long. The dragons were very clo- "Ano Taku, poop duty!" E.L. crowed. Kim flinched. E.L. either had a prophetic power or he was just very used to dragons, because the entire group of dragons swooped over them, heedless of the glowing barrier, and immediately began to barrage the entire festival with stinky, steaming brown lumps of what smelled, looked like, and really couldn't have been anything but fecal matter. They dropped a round around the round (ish) area of the carnival, smacking most of the blackbirds out of the sky as they did so, and began to return to the entrance where Elle and too-many-people-at-this-point-to-bother-counting were still standing.

E.L.'s cry had spared them some discomfort. His white-haired companion had instantly sprung into action, materializing four large umbrellas to cover the people at the gates. The two women who had been heading their way to begin with had raced under the safety of the umbrellas just in time, while everyone else in the carnival yelled in surprise, anger, and a little bit of panic at the unwanted presents. If the dragons' presence had worried them, the dragons' 'attack' was confusing them. The mysterious voice bothering Elle seemed to agree with the general sentiment. "I don't know about you, but that is the weirdest version of 'destruction incarnate rains down on the treasure of the ages' I have ever seen. I really hope this isn't what it was referring to." What was it talking about? Nav seemed to know. Her head whipped around to look at the other women and her face turned white.

"This can't be it, Nemo." One of the other women said. This one has milky white skin and dark black hair, but something about her made Elle vaguely think of food, more specifically rice and cheese, which were not foods she thought much about on normal occasions. "The carnival went up today, and it's not any kind of treasure."

"It may have more to do with why the dragons are here. Let's wait and see." Astaroth addressed the women, and the voice, in far less formal terms than he had used with the four seafarers earlier.

This had nothing to do with them, and the number of people all stuck in one place talking about things that did not make any sense without letting anyone else get a word in edgewise was starting to get to Elle. And apparently to Tari. She gently pried E.L. off of Nav, and grabbed the dangling handle of one of the umbrellas floating above them. "Let's go." She hissed, trying to gather just the four of them. Elle was all for it. Nav, on the other hand, still had her eyes intently on the two women and Astaroth.

"I'm sorry, Tari." She was clearly distracted. "I need to know what's going on."

"No, you don't." Tari insisted, mouth set in a stubborn line, still trying to push them on their way. E.L. didn't physically try to stop her, but his face was set halfway between amusement and concern.

It was his white-haired friend who spoke up, voice somber, eyes dull. "Yes, she does. This has to do with all of us, little friend. You too."

"Besides!" E.L. chirped. "Do you really want to go out into that?" He pointed again. What was him and all the pointing? Pointing did make his point, though. Though the poop rain had only come through briefly, the effects of it were still overwhelmingly evident. There was dragon dung littering the ground, and most people were choosing between trying to take cover, angrily cleaning out their stalls, or running around in a mad panic yelling various things along the lines of "ew." It was not a pretty sight, and it would have been hard enough to walk through without having to worry about other people swarming them because they had an umbrella. "Oh look! They're here." With an exaggerated motion to shade his eyes, E.L. brought their attention to the sight of the twenty or so dragons that had finished their rounds and were almost upon them.

As people ran to get out of the way, the dragons made as if to land, but once they got close enough to the ground, each one began to change shape, taking on human forms and landing on their feet. They seemed primarily concerned with Astaroth, opting to ignore Nav's crew and the two men sticking with them. Kim forgot she was scared. She stared at the dragon-people open-mouthed. From the skies they had been hard to see as more than large shapes with wings, but as they had gotten closer, she was convinced she had seen each shape MADE out of something different. The people in front of them looked like regular people, but Kim couldn't tear her eyes away from them. The two women who were heading off the group were excruciatingly beautiful and wore strange clothes. One wore a dress that looked as though it had been stitched together with a thousand roses. The other was covered with a soft, yellow-ish- wait, was that butter? Why wasn't it melting? The others were much the same, each garbed in some strange object fluidly woven together into one.

The one covered with roses opened her mouth – a mouth Kim suddenly realized was filled with a row of intimidatingly sharp teeth – and roared. "WHAT HAVE YOU DONE, MORTALS?" Her voice was most certainly loud enough to be heard across the entire carnival, large though it was. "WE HAVE LEFT YOU IN PEACE FOR MANY YEARS, TAKING ONLY WHAT WE HAD TO, AND WHAT HAVE YOU DONE?"

Astaroth stepped forward to greet her, refusing to shout back. "What have we done, Madam Rose? To what do we owe the pleasure of your arrival?"

Fury seemed to glisten in her eyes, and when she opened her mouth again, Kim knew she was not the only one who could see a hot glow from inside it, ready to spill forth flames. She wasn't certain how that was supposed to work for human-shaped dragons, but she got the feeling the fire would be just as big and hot as if it had come from the full-sized dragon. She flinched, but before the Rose Dragon could spit any fire, the other woman held out her hand to stop her. "Are you saying it was not you who destroyed our mountains and killed our latest clutch of eggs?" Her voice was softer, and there was a courteous smile on her lips, but the look in her eyes was steel and fire, daring him to lie.

The Duke paused for a moment, then took a step and kneeled in front of her. It was an odd action, Kim thought, but she wasn't quite certain why she felt this way, and could only watch silently. "Butter Dragon." E.L. snorted, but no one else seemed to find this situation funny. "I am of the people of Galer. Long have we been protected by your mountains, and we would not dare to deface them. We have neither the power nor the disrespect to do so. Please, tell us more of your plight, that we might help." There was another choke of laughter from E.L. at this pointlessly formal mode of speech.

The Butter Dragon was taking it quite seriously, though. "Those of us you see before you were away from the mountains, searching for more food for our latest clutch. Five eggs had been born. We have never had five eggs in one clutch, mortal. The last of us took off less than a day before I returned to find the mountains gone. There is no longer a way into Galer, and all the other dragons, and the five eggs we rejoiced over, were destroyed with it." Astaroth did not move, head still bowed so it was difficult to tell his expression, but the line of his shoulders tensed. "The wreckage was drowned in the smell of you mortals, and we followed that smell here. We came to see what you had to say for yourselves, only to be attacked by your sentries in the sky. Do you still claim innocence now, Imperatores of Iwaku?"

A hush settled over the area, as most of the people had ran and the few that remained intently waited for his response. "Yes." That single word resounded heavily. "In recent days, many of our kind have been busy preparing for the carnival you see yourselves in, and those you would call our sentries are naught but disreputable bandits come to torment us. We ask that you would show us mercy, and believe our sincerity. You have been deceived, and we can only grieve with you in your loss."

"Grief." The butter dragon shook her head gravely. "We do not ask for pretty words for our pain, but retribution. If you claim it was not you who took from us. Discover who did. We will not be satisfied with less."

"Well, that's rude." Came a bubbly and all-too-bright voice. "The mortals have been putting their stinky feet all over your mountains for centuries, of course it smells like them. We all know why you're really here, Diana Buttershifter. Now if you'll excuse me, I'm waiting for a guest, and you're all blocking the way." The source of a voice was Anaia. No one knew when she had arrived or how long she had been there, but she was standing right next to the dragons still in Cherilyn's form. Her arms were folded over her chest, but her face was practically glowing with amusement.

"Anaia?" Nav gasped, shrinking back as the short girl walked closer to the gate. The only people who didn't seem to know who she was were Tari and Kimberly, as they were the only ones who didn't stiffen up instinctively at the sound of her name.

"What do you mean? Why are they here, Anaia Tsukasa?" Astaroth demanded, picking himself up off the ground and pulling himself to his full, menacing height.

She giggled and poked him in the chest. "Well, there's only one thing that can level a mountain range like that, and that's a god. The dragons have come to help, and to send a message: run." She laughed. "Isn't that so much fun?"

Of all the strange creatures in Iwaku, the kraken was one of the strangest. The kraken did not have a name, but he was the only one of his kind, anyways, so he liked to think he didn't really need one. Contrary to popular convictions, the kraken was not a deep-sea dweller, and he was currently puffing away at a hookah in a bespoke suit (since generic ones are hard to come by when you're shaped like a squid). The hookah was a long and twisted one, happily wrapping around the large tree he was sitting in. In fact, it appeared the tree itself was the body of the hookah and it was difficult to tell where the tree began and the hookah pipes began. He was puffing multicolored bubbles from it even despite his beak of a mouth. He had been sitting there for years, in the forest of New Ardep, farming fairies where no one could find them.

New Ardep was a beautiful place. Unlike the forests of Grene's Bay, the trees were still and quiet, allowing plenty of sunshine to penetrate their thick green canvas. New Ardep was very old, which made sense since Old Ardep had never existed in the first place, but the tiny civilization flourishing in the brighter reaches of the forest was not even half a century old. Hundreds of small humanoids bustled about, making themselves food and elegant little buildings in the branches of the trees. The sunlight glinted off their delicate, insect-like wings, and they harvested this too, as sunlight was what allowed them to stay awake. Though they had originally been made to hibernate, the kraken had warned them that any slackers would be purged. He had made good on this threat several times over the past 40 years or so.

"Master Kraken." The voice was even smaller than the tiny little fairy delivering it. His fear was justifiable, at least. Beyond the kraken's tyrannical nature towards the fairies, he was also frightening in appearance. His mottled red skin and bulging eyes would have been scary enough without the hundreds of scars and bite marks marring his features.

"What is it, Felton?" The kraken drawled, long tentacles sliding through the trees with slow, slimy rustling. He gave a few more puffs of the hookah and Felton had to dodge a bubble popping out of one of the random tubes sticking out from around the tree.

The fairy squeaked in alarm, then coughed to regain its composure. "There are two... presences approaching the forest. What do we do? What are they?" His gossamer wings beat quickly.

The kraken took a big draft from his hookah and blew smoke at the fairy. "Those two 'presences' are known as gods, Felton. Those are two of the only twelve left in Iwaku, and they've come because fairies make nice, fluid new vessels for them. Why else do you think I've been here watching you all for so long?" The slimy rustling got louder as all of his tentacles began to move, winding away from around the tree and bunching up around his body. The only thing that stayed in place was the tentacle holding the mouth of the hookah to his beak. Leaning back farther against the tree, the monster continued blowing bubbles, more and more of them floating into the air. Fel could only avoid them for so long. One bubble trapped him, while the others wandered farther off into the forest, capturing more and more fairies and bringing them back to him. It had been a long time since the kraken had gathered the fairies, but you did what you had to when it was time to run. He took a total of twenty. The rest would have to become god-bait.

Wrapping several tentacles around the bubbles of captured, screaming fairies, the kraken began to move, really move, for the first time since he'd settled in his hookah tree. He let go of the hookah and in one bunch sprang from his tree, swinging from branch to branch, heading out of the forest. He had known this time was coming. He did not know why two of the Gates had collapsed, but the sickness spreading through the land had warned him of what was to come. The birthplace of Norlathel and Imvadrim was dying, and he was not ready to be literally turned into calamari just because the heart of the land was warping and giving him nightmares. It was only a matter of time, he knew, before what happened to Jorick happened to him. As he swung through the forest like a slimy monkey, he began distributing the fairies. They disappeared one by one deep into secret hiding places of the earth, where they would be safe until it was time for them to break out again. By the time he had left the familiarity of the trees, all the bubbles were gone from his tentacles. That didn't mean his job was over, though. There was one more thing he had to do before the end.
 
A History of Iwaku by Herzi of Querzi (Abbr Ver.)

Excess Exposition Chapter I - The Age of the Gods

The history of Iwaku has always been something of a mystery to most of us mortals, and after being laughed at by an Immortal for an erroneous assumption some eighty years ago, I decided to make it my life's mission hunting down the truth and sharing it with the rest of you. Oddly enough, I found it a rather enjoyable hobby to obsess over when I am not writing for the newspaper, and suspect that even after this retelling I will discover many new facts about our history that are hidden in dusty stacks of books in dramatically furnished ancient libraries guarded by Harpies of Knowledge or something. Regardless, I have taken it upon myself, now that I am older and reaching the end of my life, to organize what I know in as concise a manner as possible, in my rambling old age. Perhaps if I live to a hundred I will try my hand at a more detailed version that will one day be stuck in a dramatically furnished ancient library guarded by Harpies of Knowledge and be treated as gospel, but for now, I think it's best we stick with the 'for idiots/tourists' version.

Before we get into how Iwaku begin, I think it best I explain what Iwaku is, as I discovered rather to my shock several decades ago that most tourists would be hard-pressed to define its borders, and most locals don't bother to discover what's outside their door. Iwaku is a continent. A small continent, as continents go, but one that also doubles as an empire of sorts. While the rulers of Iwaku have always technically called it a country, they rule over a vast area separated into a number of different domains, a few of which have their own rulers and hierarchies themselves, the most prominent of which is known as Galer, a land that exists in a different dimension and can only be found by passing through a secret cave of red stone in the Dragons' Mountains. Most people reading this should be somewhat aware of the fact, but the name Galer itself has become something of a popular curse in the heart of Iwaku's capitol city of Iwaku. Yes, the capitol city is named the same as the continent-empire-country, which is precisely why I felt the need to clarify some things. To outsiders, the capitol Iwaku is also known as the White City, and that is how I shall refer to it from now on. Galer is also referred to as the Land of the Dead. It is an exceptionally popular misconception in the White City that Galer is the inhospitable home of angry ghosts and barbarians who ride on skeleton-horses and eat brains, but it did actually earn its name as the Land of the Dead many thousands of years ago, when mortals were first really starting to populate the earth, because it does indeed house a race of mindless humanoids in a state of half-decay that do enjoy eating brains. In more recent times, however, its civilizations of mortals have produced some of the fiercest and proudest warriors of Iwaku, heavily loyal to their homeland. I mention all this now in the hopes that it will make the last chapters easier to slog through, and because if I don't do it now I'm likely to forget to do so later.

The second thing I should probably address before we begin is magic, as I understand this is one thing that does not exist outside of our shores. The system of magic in Iwaku is not exactly well thought-through, and indeed it would be a bit of a stretch (if not an actual affront) to call it a system at all. I'd love to say something deep about the irony of reality, but the truth is that the gods probably just didn't give enough of a fuck to do the world building for it. This would also explain why the world simply drops off if you walk eastward far enough, but goes on into a fog no one's ever seen the end of if you head in the opposite direction. I think they disagreed on whether or not it was supposed to be round. At any rate, to summarize, there appear to be only two restrictions on what can or cannot be done with magic in Iwaku: 1. You can't tell if your mind control magic is actually working. 2. There is no such thing as time travel. Well, technically there is, but even if you go back and change stuff in the past, all witnesses will remember the original chain of events so nothing much actually changes. Other than that, pretty much everything goes. It is as the first of Jorick the Separating's Egos once said when inquired about the nature of its creation: "What does it matter how it was done as long as it happened? Even Jorick doesn't know." Smirks were, of course, included. According to the account, one of the more technical Jorick's began to argue with the other about the technicalities of the magic, but the interviewer stops transcribing at this point and declares that it is pointless to listen to, much less write down, an argument made by anyone who thinks the Chinese language actually has a grammar.

Now that we've got those two orders of business out of the way, let us begin.

Iwaku, and this entire world altogether, does not strictly speaking have a recorded beginning. The farthest records and oldest Immortals all concur that there was already something in these lands before the advent of the gods, and that something was the land itself as a physical, living entity known as Imvadrim, and all of her children – living trees, strange monsters, the 'Living Dead' of Galer, and the wyverns, commonly mistaken for 'wild dragons.' When Imvadrim came into being or how is unknown to all, it seems, but herself. It is also unclear whether or not her 'children' are born somehow or are created the same way the Immortals were, which bring us to the Immortals and the ones we know as the gods.

How the gods came into being is as mysterious as how Imvadrim did, but there are some records (ones that I have admittedly been unable to confirm) that suggest that they were born in another world entirely and fled from some great catastrophe. From what I can gather, talk of this old world became forbidden amongst the gods, and too few relayed the story to their creations for it to be written down as more than hearsay. One thing is certain, however: they were powerful. Confusing as Iwaku's system of magic is, only the gods could simply will things into existence and cause the environment to change around them just by existing. They did not have limitations, but it seems they had certain natural affinities for what I can best describe as elements. As with so many other things from back then, it's difficult to determine how many gods there were, but the main players you need to know of are the two goddesses. The Goddess of Life and the Goddess of Death are the only two goddesses I could find anywhere in Immortal writings, and the old ones I have talked to have told me themselves that all the other gods alive at the time of their creation were male. Why gods have gender escapes me, but some have said a Goddess of Worlds was a third sister of the two goddesses and sacrificed her life to bring them to Iwaku.

Upon arriving at Iwaku, the gods began to expand upon the original lands of Imvadrim. They called Imvadrim's lands Iwaku, and built new continents separated from Iwaku by vast stretches of water that we know as the seas. With no known prompting, they populated their new lands with animals and trees and even some rough forms of magicless mortals, supposedly naming these lands after those they had come across in their travels. Then they started making Immortals. Immortals were a feat of magic that surpassed everything else the gods had created, it seems, as every first-generation Immortal required two gods to be created, specifically one of the two goddesses and one of the other gods, and few of the male gods enjoyed making multiple Immortals. The goddesses, however, couldn't make enough. One of the more talkative Immortals I have come into contact with insisted that the gods were nothing more than "creepy old coots who liked making little harems" to explain the proliferation of female Immortals, but I would like to think that the goddesses were lonely, and I am not certain how much say the male gods had on the genders of their creations. Whatever the case may be, once the first Immortal was made, more followed.

Immortals separate themselves out into four types. Though Immortals are careful to refer to themselves as 'creations' of the gods, this first type of creation was what they called the first-generation single-father Immortal. These were the only types of Immortals for some time, but then the first Immortal romance happened, or was forced to happen by the illusive God of Love, and then came the second type of Immortal – the second-generations. It sounds as though the gods had not made Immortals with the intent to have them breed, but that changed after the first Immortal child was born. Apparently starting with the God of Creatures, gods began to create Immortals intended for each other and cultivated the first clans of Immortals. The third type of Immortal is known as the first-generation multi-fathered, and it is here where things get interesting. According to Immortal legend, the first multi-fathered Immortal was created accidentally, when the God of Balance tricked the Gods of Darkness and Light to attempt to create an Immortal together for his sense of aesthetic. The Goddess of Life gave her 'breath of life' and that was the first Immortal created with the powers of two male gods. This was a turning point in the creation of Immortals. Though at this time fewer and fewer Immortals were being created, the Immortal known as the Black and White was stronger than almost any other Immortal in existence, and some of the gods started to experiment. More gods got dragged into making multi-fathered Immortals. It was an innocent pursuit with one surprising, and unfortunate consequence.

There are a lot of notable Immortals in the annals of history, all with monstrously long lists of nicknames that I am too lazy to fit in this abridged version, but this Immortal bears naming. This story was told to me by the first-generation double-fathered Immortal the Bringer of Fates. The Four-Fathered, as she was known, was the product of four of the most volatile gods, and long story short they attempted to pair her with the Black and White. Claiming he was boring, she refused. The God of Love attempted to step in, but before his presence took effect, she turned on the Black and White and killed him. This was the first blood shed among the Immortals and gods, and it caused an uproar. The gods began to argue amongst themselves about what to do, and the Immortal went on the run. It was here she took on the name the Immortal Hunter. Technically, she was being hunted by Immortals who saw her as a threat, but rumors spread that she had learned to enjoy the taste of blood, for more and more of her chasers found themselves stalked down and killed in increasingly inventive ways. During this time, the number of Immortals dwindled under the noses of the arguing gods. Immortal children grew slowly and even clans took time to build a single family, being hunted was taking its toll. Eventually, the God of Fear 'imposed his will' on newborn Immortals so that they would no longer offer themselves up as prey to her. I am still not sure what the Bringer of Fates meant by this phrase, but he refused to explain when I asked further, and the most I can surmise is that he forced them to be afraid of the Immortal Hunter somehow.

For a time, this safe-guard was sufficient and peace returned to the ranks of gods and Immortals alike, but it had started a stir amongst the gods that culminated in their greatest mistake: the creation of Norlathel.

References to Norlathel have been relatively well-hidden from us mortals. When I first began my search for information on the end of the Age of the Gods, I thought this dearth of written record was due to harsh battles, but later works make it clear that all references to what they then called the War of the Gods were burned in a great ceremony for unknown reasons. They couldn't erase everything, though, and the following is everything of the story I could salvage:

The gods decided to make an ultimate creation. It appears some opposed this idea, but most felt that the different Immortals were distancing some gods from the others, especially the four who had created the Immortal Hunter. No one wanted varying Immortals to turn into weapons against each other. In an attempt to unify themselves once again, the gods decided to create an Immortal that would together be a child of all of them. For the first time, both goddesses were asked to help create a single being. On this one thing I could find no details at all, but upon the creation of Norlathel some new catastrophe occurred. It killed the Goddess of Life along with several other key peaceful gods and sent the more dangerous gods and the Goddess of Death, on strange rampages that killed off hundreds of Immortals. Somehow, Norlathel's essence fused with Imvadrim and formed the tallest mountain in existence, hidden far away on one edge of Iwaku, eternally covered with mist and darkness.

The War of the Gods itself can also be considered the Birth of the Mortals. The rampaging gods began to kill both Immortals and other gods, and the remaining gods tried to make more Immortals, these with more bloodthirsty traits, but without the breath of a Goddess, these creatures aged and died. They became defective weapons. We became defective weapons, but kill was all we were meant to do and kill we did, apparently. The ancient mortals were wildly successful killing machines and far easier to produce than any Immortal, even when gifted with magical abilities. Taking down a rampaging god was no easy task, and many more mortals died than successfully killed, but somehow they took the gods down, bit by bit, until only a few were left. Those few were somehow bound into a secret prison, and the gods that remained faded into the back of history, leaving a handful of frightened Immortals and a lot of purposeless mortals to fend for themselves in a world they were not really born into. That was the ambiguous end of the Age of the Gods, but not the end of lots and lots of people dying – the last benevolent gods included.
 
Chapter 3 - Lots of Twenties (should have been the last chapter's title)

Madelyn was sitting in a "closed" booth, clutching the miraculously-not-melting chocolate Terrier as if it was a lifeline. Several other people were jammed in there with them, and she felt just about ready to melt, herself, so it was a wonder the Princeps Imperator was not doing so. He seemed actually fairly calm, though it wasn't as though she couldn't be sure, since they couldn't speak to one another. She looked down at the dog in her arms. His head was turned and he appeared to be staring very intently at the vinyl wall of the booth. He had been like this since the dragons had appeared overhead.

The three of them, she, Jorick, and Anaia, had barely had a chance to explore the carnival before Anaia had given a little shudder and turned her eyes on the gates, saying there was something urgent she needed to take care of. Madelyn had always liked the Immortal, probably more than most did, but perhaps precisely because of that, she knew there were things the shifter didn't tell her. Anaia had given one of her outrageous curtsies and left without much more than a "take care of yourself," but there had definitely been something wrong.

She felt a pressure on the base of her neck and looked down to see the dog finally looking up at her very seriously. He pressed his paw more insistently against her neck and after attempting, and failing, to wheeze out words, barked urgently. "Huh?" She squinted at him slightly, and he pointed with his nose very insistently towards the opening in the booth. Madelyn didn't own any dogs, but her face lit up at the action. She really couldn't imagine this cute little thing as the mighty Jorick the Separating, one of the three most powerful beings in all of Iwaku. She looked up at the entrance to see what he was pointing at, but saw nothing. Whining a little, he pawed at her arm, and she got the message and headed for it. Despite their inability to communicate verbally, Jorick slowly nose-nudged her in the direction he'd been staring, neither of them knowing where they were headed or why. Whatever was past the scary, cordoned off area, the unhappy people, and the dung-covered streets, Jorick knew he had to see it, and he got the feeling that the woman carrying him did, too.

Rose the Rose Dragon had her jaw clenched so tightly, a muscle in it was twitching. After that shocking little announcement, the Immortal Hunter had demanded they all leave. She was the IMMORTAL Hunter, not the Dragon Hunter, so Rose had wanted to protest the order, but the man who had stepped up to meet them had ushered everyone else away without hesitation, and Diana had made no objection. It all made Rose so angry. She wasn't sure what to make of the strange accusations the Immortal Hunter had made, either. The gods? Warning the Iwakuans to run? All she knew was that she had left the mountain for a few hours and come back to see their home defiled. Five eggs lost somewhere under the wreckage of an entire mountain strewn with the bodies of dragons, including that of the mother of the clutch – Silver the Sparkle Dragon. It had smelled like mortals, too, more strongly than it smelled like dragons, which had been the odd part. That being the case, why had Diana not proclaimed her innocence? Not for the first time, she gave the Queen of the Dragons a sideways glance.

Diana Buttershifter was the first of the dragons, and the only one created before the War of the Gods began. She was the only one who knew what the gods were like before they became the rampaging beings of pure emotion Rose faintly remembered in the hazy memories of her childhood. She was also the only one who would have been old enough to clearly remember what the gods looked like, felt like, smelt like. Had she really- Rose cast her yet another glare. This was not like her – like them. It made no sense. They, the dragons, did not interfere in the affairs of the gods, Immortals, and mortals. She had always thought they weren't supposed to.

In an attempt to distract herself, Rose grunted, "What is this place, anyways?" They had been holed up under a large red and white tent that was miraculously empty of people, despite their spiteful little attack earlier. The large man Diana had identified as one of the Imperatores had left with a petite blonde to take care of some other problem, but the other Immortals that had been jammed around the entrance were still there.

"It's our headquarters." A dreamy voice said. Rose turned to look at the speaker. It was one of the women, the one with horns on her head. Her answer startled Rose slightly, as she had just been having a rather animated discussion with a couple of the others about the things that had to be taken care of to get the carnival running again, if this could be called a carnival. It looked more like a brightly colored jail to Rose. The golden shield preventing everyone from leaving had not escaped her notice. The woman continued to speak, airily. "It's where we watch everyone. Make sure they're… safe." And then she turned to give Rose a sideways glance, a smile playing about her lips, and the dragon realized that her eyes were blood-red.

Narrowing her eyes right back, Rose retorted, "Safe from what? And who are you to be determining what's safe and what's not?"

"Oh, me?" The woman rose from her seat. "How rude, we haven't introduced ourselves yet. My name is Pahndora de Mie, and you see, it's my job to 'determine what's safe and what's not' for everyone else. As my lord Jorick demands." She gave a brief bow that was probably meant to be polite, but came off instead as exceptionally insulting. "I'm an Imperatrix. But what about you?" She gave a her hair a little pat, before challenging, "You're awfully loud to speak, even though anyone who knows anything about dragons knows that the Butter Dragon should be your leader."

Both sets of eyes turned to look at Diana, who was whole-heartedly not paying attention to them, eyes instead on a small Immortal sitting with some of the others. Rose grit her teeth. "You can kiss my ass, mortal. We may live in Iwaku, but we dragons have never bowed down to the likes of you stuck up one-formed two-legs. You may think you're some kind of queen, but you don't have any authority among our kind."

Far from seeming at all deterred by Rose's strong words, Pahndora's red eyes seemed to gleam with excitement. "Oh my. I do wish I had the free time to play with you, dragon. It's too bad I'm a bit busy, at the moment. Let's leave you with a little question, though, shall we? If the dragons can't be controlled by our kind, and your queen apparently didn't come here for revenge at all, then why do you think you were really brought here?" She leaned closer and whispered with cherry red lips. "Or is there perhaps something you don't know, proud little flower?" She pulled back away and cast Diana another glance before going to rejoin the three others she had been speaking to: two male immortals and another mortal woman. Unable to control herself, Rose also gave Diana another glare, only to discover she had left her seat and was approaching the girl she had been staring at earlier. What was it now…?

"May I join you?" A gentle voice asked the sailors in the corner. All four Immortals looked up at her, but her eyes were undeniably trained on Kim. Elle took a step forward as if to protect the girl and Tari grabbed Kim's arm in a death-grip. Nav made no reaction, other than to stare at the dragon with a pale face and wide, haunted eyes.

Elle glanced over at Nav as if asking her to help, but almost instantly surmised that her captain would be useless for a bit. "Don't get much closer. Why do you keep staring at Kim?"

Diana's smile was as gentle as her voice, but there was that note of iron in it, as there had been earlier when she'd been speaking to the Princeps Imperator. "I was simply wondering how one of my own descendants ended up in the company of a rag-tag group of Immortals. Kim, was your name?" She addressed Kimberly directly. The girl was honestly just as openly fascinated by Diana as Diana was by her.

Tari spoke this time, voice quavering slightly. "It's none of your business." She gripped Kim's arm a little more tightly, and pulled her back slightly away from the dragon.

"I'd say it is." Her tone growing a little icier, but not unkind.

Elle waved her hand in a soothing gesture meant for both sides. "Look, Tari and Kimberly have been together a long time, Ms… Butter Dragon thing, but Kim is one of us. She's been a part of our crew since we rescued her and Tari from a slave ship, and I consider her as dear to me as if she was one of my children, so if you want to mess with her, you'll have to get through me first. Who are you to her, and what do you want?"

The Butter Dragon smiled at Elle in a fond manner and gave a small, but not condescending laugh. "I fell in love with an Immortal long ago. We had three children, but he was killed by mortals during one of the wars. I searched everywhere, but found none of my children and was forced to believe that they had also perished. That girl is a Dracari. She has dragon blood in her and it calls us to each other. I know you already know this. She's shown signs of dragon blood in her before, hasn't she? Scales that show up when she's upset, a tendency to calm people down when she walks into a room."

Elle Joyner blinked at her. "W- Yes, scales, but the calming people down I thought-"

"You thought that was just because that was just something people with her temperament did?" Diana finished for her, almost bordering on smug. "My dear, we dragons feed on emotions. As the Butter Dragon I feed mostly on desire, but when many people are upset, it is easiest to feed off of that. She probably doesn't even know she's been doing it, but it's been fueling her magic. Have you ever tested your draconic powers, young one?" Tari kept tugging her arm, but Kim looked straight at Diana and shook her head very seriously, a spark of excitement and curiosity still lingering there. "I did not think so." Turning her attention back on the sailor, Diana offered, "Let me help her. Whatever is happening has been dangerous. If I can teach her to use some of her own draconian magic, she will be able to protect herself better. Even if she does not have to learn to protect herself, we are the last of the dragons, and we don't know how much longer our kind will survive. Just give me a little time with the descendant I never got the chance to spend time with, and I will be able to help her deal with the things she does not understand, about herself and her blood."

"Don't do it." Tari objected, but Elle had been heavily swayed by her argument. She gave a pause, but then stepped aside to let Diana sit with them.

The lizard-girl nearly bared her teeth at Diana, but the dragon just sat down cross-legged in front of them and told her, "I just want to talk. I promise. I won't hurt either of you." That didn't succeed in making Tari relax, but she gradually did as Diana continued to talk, explaining things to a wide-eyed Kim. Elle lost track of it all after a while, and eventually retreated back to her initial position by Nav's side. She hated seeing her like this. A motion caught her eye and she noticed the two men leaving the tent. The pale lady and the one with horns continued to talk amongst themselves rather seriously, but the other dragons kept to themselves, looking disgruntled and watching their leader carefully. Whatever was going on, she hoped this woman knew what she was doing, because the number of eyes trained on them was growing rather disconcerting.

The sound of the phone dialing was oddly loud in the face of the empty workshop. She had been sitting there since the Egos had left, trying to figure out what had just happened. Her hand shook as she held the ancient little blue flip phone with only thirty-three numbers in it. No one was picking up her calls. It really wasn't very good for her balance of mind. The person on the other end finally picked up. "Helloooo? Who diss?"

"ANAIA YOU BITCH WHAT THE FUCK IS GOING ON?!"

"Wow. Not even a greeting, huh? What's upset you enough to actually use my number, Rissssa?" The Immortal Hunter's cheeky voice crackled through the other end of the line, and it took all of Marissa's willpower not to physically crush the phone in her hand. She had been sure she would never have to use this number, but desperate times.

"You know something." She accused, demanding an answer of some sort.

"I know lots of things!" The redhead interjected, just to be obnoxious.

"You know EXACTLY what I'm talking about. The Egos. All of them, they just- They bowed or something. They were talking about- Something is going to happen, isn't it, and as usual you and those bastards are in the center of it and aren't telling me what's going on. The rest of them know, don't they? If it's just me in the dark again, I'm going to-"

"Oh relax, silly." Anaia said, her voice as teasing as ever. "It's not just you. We couldn't let Genavieve or Ano know, either, of course. Those silly Egos gave the game away early, but I supposed they couldn't leave without saying goodbye. They have been your DELICIOUS BAES forever, and especially since Jorick wanted to go prancing off to pretend he was a mortal. You were always meant to find out everything, anyways, though, so don't sweat the small things, my friend! Bye now, I'm kind of busy."

Before Rissa could say anything more, she heard the click that meant she'd just been hung up on. She pulled the phone away from her ear and stared at it in her hand. The tanned woman sucked in a deep breath and held it. For just a second, it seemed as if she was going to let the breath go and relax, but then her face turned red, she opened her mouth, and screamed, "I SWEAR I'M GOING TO KILL YOU." As the words burst from her mouth, the workshop exploded outwards, no fire necessary for the wood and metal to essentially turn to shrapnel. Before it could land anywhere or strike anyone, however, every piece stopped, shreds simply hanging in the air. The short, but intimidating woman known most widely by the name Dismantler of Wars looked about ready to start one. Her skin glowed with power and as she turned around and began to walk away from the wreckage of her old workshop, the little pieces began to fall to the ground like rain. The few people who had not taken shelter following the desecration of defecation were clearly not having the greatest reaction to her little display, but for the first time in a long time, Marissa was angry, and she didn't care. She had to go find Gwazi, and he was going to tell her what was going on whether he liked it or not.

Anaia chuckled, dangling her cell phone in her hand casually. The Immortal, still as a small redhead, had her two feet planted on the ground in front of the gate of the carnival. She couldn't leave any more than anyone else could. Not like this, anyhow. That was fine, though, the guest she had been expecting was here and ready to come to her, if only he put those slimy tentacles over the border. The kraken did not look happy to see her, but then again how was a creature like that supposed to look happy? "So? Did you do what I asked you to do?" She called over to him. He was standing a good 10 feet away from her, supporting himself in a ridiculous manner on six of his tentacles, while his main two were winding around themselves in front of him, as if he was attempting to cross his arms, only didn't have the bones to do it only once.

He took his time to answer her question, drawling his words as he always did. "Of course I did. Why else would I be here, Tsu-ka-sa?"

The fiery bird nestled in her hair flared its wings in an unsettled manner. "You know how much I hate it when you call me that, squid." She taunted, back. "Now, are you going to come over here so momma can give the good little monster a big pat on the head? Or are you going to stand there all day?"

The kraken's bulging eyes stared her down with a morose suspicion. He let out a heavy sigh but then lunged forward, tentacles outstretched as he crossed the threshold of the carnival. The long appendages seemed ready to crush her, but she jumped away from them, high off the ground. The bird atop her head left its perch and transformed into a weapon wreathed in flames. It was difficult to discern what exactly the item was, at first, but as she dove down towards the kraken, the wind whipped away some of the flames and revealed its form; it was a steak knife. The kraken dodged, but could not avoid a gash in one of its tentacles, spurting green blood. He hissed in pain, trying to jerk away, but they had already started the game they always played when they met again.

The little redhead opened her mouth and was quite suddenly not so little anymore. Her jaw extended and extended, rows of sharp teeth making a shark's mouth that snapped shut, narrowly missing the monster's hide. Her steak knife became an enormous fork, and off they went, her stabbing and poking with various forms of cutlery, and him attempting to throttle her to death without getting bitten. His strategy was really a constant mistake. He should know better, but he always seemed to forget that he was a squid waiting to be turned into a culinary treat, and the best thing to do was keep his distance. It was why she never failed to get at least a couple bites in.

"Hey!" She didn't sound out of breath at all, still cheerily hopping about with her cutlery. "You know how usually we stop fighting when I'm bored of trying to eat you and you remember why you actually came to see me?"

The kraken kept his suspicious tone of voice, though a little twinge of annoyance colored it. "Yes?"

"Well today the game is a little different!" She laughed and suddenly turned tail and ran deeper into the carnival. The kraken wasted no time in launching himself after her, indifferent to the possibility of a trap and quite unaware of where they were going. As they both ran, she continued to yell cheerfully back at him. "I'm relieving you of duty, by the way, old friend! My children will explain everything about you later to the others, so relax!" This only seemed to anger him further, and he flung a couple of frightened people out of the way a little more vigorously than was necessary. It didn't stop her from continuing to speak, "Oh yeah! You have one last role and everything, so smile! You're finally gonna get that fight to the death you always wanted! I'll assassinate you magnificently in your honor! Oh. Here we are." She stopped shouting, then, and came to an abrupt halt in a quickly emptying portion of the main street (the carnival-goers appeared to finally understand that the best thing to do was hole themselves up inside and get out of the way of people trying to kill each other, etc.), stopping her momentum so quickly that the kraken almost crashed headlong into her. He managed to stop himself in time by hooking his tentacles around some things, but all the same came perilously close to what might have been a deadly collision, considering how fast they had been going.

Though he'd taken her initial change in pace well, he seemed alarmed by her sudden stop. "What are you planning?" He asked her, blowing a couple bubbles from his beak with the help of what was most definitely a pipe, though goodness knew where he'd gotten it from in the first place.

She snorted and tilted her head, for a moment silent, as if someone was speaking to her. "I already told you. It's a fight to the death, and this time I'm going to win." She looked at him then, and he saw her dissecting him with her eyes, planning his death with meticulous detail. Where he would go, how he would die, he could see it reflected in not the girl's eyes, but the beady black eyes of the flaming bird atop her head. That was one thing he had never expected to see directed at him, at least, and something he had not seen at all since she had split with the water witch so long ago. She was serious. She was going to kill him… was she? They had been contentious friends for a long time, but always friends, in the end.

Giving another irritated puff of the pipe, he stowed it away again, and decided it wasn't worth thinking about. He'd always known the bitch was some sort of spy-assassin-freak-thing who might end up killing him. Whether or not she killed him, that depended on who managed to do what, now, didn't it?

The kraken began to pull weapons out of nowhere, long ones, sharp ones, a gun, a crossbow, chain weapons, but she simply looked at him. Without warning, he aimed the crossbow at her and fired, immediately following up by jumping high into the area, prepared to bear down on her from above and trap her if she tried to flee. Her humanoid form vanished in a poof of dust before the arrow touched it, but he knew he had guessed her second course of action correctly. The fiery little bird flew up and up as he fell down, tentacles reaching for it. Just as he seemed about to reach it, it looked up at him. Even at that odd angle, they managed to look right into each other's eyes, and that was when he heard her voice in his mind, her real voice, not high or affected. You were always going to lose, right from the beginning.

He constructed several magical barriers around himself as quickly as he could, but even before he landed, he could feel a hot blade bearing down on the back of his head/body. He turned around, but at this proximity, and with her sword wreathed in a pure fire that repelled magic, he knew he had no chance. The sword pierced straight through the bony plate in his head and impaled him onto the ground with a loud crack, causing green blood and black ink to spurt all over the new form she had taken on: that of a slender woman with long black hair and white-less, pupil-less grey eyes. It was the last thing he ever saw.

Anaia Tsukasa stood up on top of the body of the kraken and pulled the blade from his back with another little spray of blood. As she did so, a small, but brilliant twinkle of light burst from him and hung in the air for a moment, before wobbling slightly and popping out of existence like a bubble. She felt the Eleventh Gate of Norlathel collapse painfully inside of her own body, and knew the collapse of another Gate would be felt by most of the others as well. As well it should.

A spatter of dark liquid going right across her face like war paint, she turned her attention to the people who had just arrived. Sophie had been right after all, and their timing was perfect. Madelyn stood in front of her, still clutching the chocolate Jorick in a stranglehold, staring at her wide-eyed. This was the form she'd been in when she'd first met the mortal, so there was no doubt Madelyn recognized her. The Immortal Hunter focused on Jorick, as if Madelyn was only so much air. Lifting her blood-drenched blade, she pointed it at him and declared, "I am the Immortal Hunter, and the Immortal known as the kraken is the first kill in a mighty hunt. I will give you tonight to find the rest of yourself, Jorick the Separating, but unless you can stop me, starting tomorrow I will begin the hunt for every Immortal trapped in this place including your new dragon guests. And then on to your precious mortals."

Groaning, Cherilyn opened her eyes, cradling her head. "Where am I?" She croaked groggily. She gave her surroundings a look and vaguely recognized it as a familiar old library. They were probably supposed to be at the carnival by now, but this looked like home. The Shire. A figure stood some distance from her and it took her a bit to clear her eyes and recognize the fellow hobbit. Books were scattered all around Holm's feet, their ransacked family library looking far worse for wear than it normally did. "Holmi?" She lifted herself off the floor and squinted at him. "What's going on? Why are we here?"

Holm looked up from the book he was holding, face drained of all color. "The…. The water spider, whatever she was, the witch. She said… that there were Immortals among the ranks of the Imperatores."

Cherilyn sat up abruptly and instantly regretted that decision, pain shooting through her temple. Wincing, she protested, "But that's-"

"Against the rules the Dismantler of Wars set down, yes I know, Cher. Everybody knows that, but something was bothering me about it, so I came here to check." His face was still white as a sheet. "It was the name Jorick. It's like we've all forgotten, but Jorick the Separating… he's not a noble from Galer at all. Kitti and Astaroth, are, yes, but Jorick the Separating shows up in books ages past, and I thought that was what was bothering me, but then I found this." He held it out to her, and Cherilyn crawled forward until she was close enough to inspect the cover.

It was kind of a disappointment to discover what he was reading. "One of mom's Immortal genealogy books…?" She asked, in something of a monotone.

"It's not a genealogy book, at all." He explained, faintly. "It's a list of the first-generation Immortals remaining alive after the War of the Gods, along with a list of their full titles and attributes, and any other things particularly special about them. These three were placed together because they shared an important godly parent. They are labeled 'the three creations of the God of Form, who alone among the Immortals were born without any form at all.'"

Cherilyn dropped her face into her hands, things were making less and less sense now. "Holm. What in the name of all the broken gods are you talking about? Speak Iwakuan. Please."

He tugged on his hair. "Okay, uhh… how do I explain this? So, uhm… y'know how mom used to give me lessons about magic and first-gens and all that stuff to prepare for when I'd take over the family? Well, she used to tell me that first-generation Immortals weren't made the same way mortals and other creatures were. I mean, they were, but not really. Like, well… for something to- be- alive it needs to have two things: a vital soul, and a working body. When one fails, so does the other, and that's why using too much magic will kill someone, just like, like stabbing them or something, y'know? The soul grows too weak to hold on to the form, or the form is no longer able to hold the soul." He dropped into a sitting position and placed the book face-down, gesturing with his hands as if that would somehow make it easier to visualize the concept. "Either way, the soul leaves and goes to some other place, or something, no one's really sure, but the exception to this rule are the gods and the first-generation Immortals. Gods are like disembodied souls, like ghosts but POWERFUL, but Immortals are… they're… they're basically Separated Beings in and of themselves. I know it doesn't make sense, but it was like… the gods took… shards of themselves and placed in physical forms created by the God of Form, and- and for most living creatures, the soul sustains the form, but these didn't, for some reason. One of the really old books I ran across, it said that that's why the goddesses needed to give their "breath of life," either the Breath of Everlasting Life or the Breath of Never-ending Undeath, I don't really know what the difference is, but for some reason that gave the bodies the ability to maintain their form forever, and that's why they were Immortal. And we- second generations – we have a little of that breath in our bloodline or something so that's why we eventually stop aging, but we're also different because we have actual… souls. I think. Anyways, that's not what matters."

Cherilyn sighed. There he went rambling again. She didn't try to stop him, her big bro would figure out what point he was trying to get to eventually. "The point is that all Immortals have a FORM made by the GOD of Form, EXCEPT for his own creations. He… made his own Separated Beings without giving them a single, solid form of their own, and that's why they can make other Separated Beings in the first place, that's why Jorick the Separating is Jorick the SEPARATING, but- but that means, that they didn't need a goddess's breath of life, and they can't be killed by killing any form they take on, they just…. Cher. I think. When first generation Immortals die… they don't die. They don't- go to wherever dead souls are supposed to go. They just… wink out of existence or something. And if these three Immortals can't be killed because they aren't winking out of existence but they don't have forms-"

"GODS DAMMIT HOLM GET TO THE POINT." She yelled, clutching her head in an attempt to protect herself from the level of noise coming from her own mouth. "What does it matter if they can't be killed or whatever fuuuuuck…" the swear word was not exactly directed at him, "we're not trying to kill any Immortals." The thought made her pause and she looked up at Holm, who had now gone suspiciously silent and was back to being pale as a corpse. "Are we?"

"We might have to." His words seemed to echo in the library.

"What?" She had heard him loud and clear, but the thought didn't really seem to quite process.

His voice was small now, but he pulled another book out of the stack and immediately flipped open to a page he'd saved with a little bookmark. "I went back looking for why the Dismantler of Wars said there shouldn't be any Immortals among the Imperatores. And it turns out…" he gulped, "it's because of a prophecy.

"The day on which the Everlasting Ones rule,
One shall kill, one shall die, one shall revel in the evil of the past.
Though none shall cry war, blood will color the ground,
And a world of utter silence mourns.

Until the sickening earth crumbles,
Until the last of her creations release her breath,
Death rain and death reign,
Till those without breath see fit to follow her home."


Without a word, Holm handed her the "genealogy book" to show her what page he'd been open to, and Cherilyn read the names written there in equal silence. She had only one, disgruntled comment to make:

"Who makes these fucking prophecies anyways?"

The sound of mirrors shaking and shattering was not a pleasant one. Gwazi Daharrin, once known as Gwazi the Unusually Large, was sitting in front of his desk in the heart of the mirror maze he'd decided to run for the carnival with his eyes squeezed shut. The Sixth, Seventh, and Eleventh Gates had all died today, and now someone was coming for him?! He whispered frantically to himself, attempting to reinforce the enchantments that made his mirror maze so difficult to win against, but magic had never been his strong suit, and whoever was coming was far more powerful than anyone he'd ever had to go up against before.

It had been a long time since Marissa had felt the power rippling through her like this, fueled by rage. Everywhere she stepped, the ground crackled underneath her feet, deconstructing and rebuilding itself a thousand times over in a single instant. She didn't bother going properly through the maze to find him in the center, she closed her eyes and focused on the energies around her, feeling his presence. As she went, the mirrors in her way shattered, yet not a single shard touched her skin, splashing harmlessly off of some sort of protective shield. Her lips moved, but the sound of her voice didn't really seem to match that movement, out of time with it and seeming to come from all around her rather than from her. From destruction, power. From power, construction. The Great Balance is spoken wrongly as the truth of balance lies in cycles not equality. Keeper of the Scales, forgotten was your duties, until wrought again we were to bring life where there is death and death where there is life. Her eyes glowed, and the image of a very old-looking set of scales appeared on her forehead, shimmering there in an ominous fashion.

The last mirror shielding Gwazi disintegrated and he peeked one eye open. Whole body relaxing, he drooped forward. "Oh gods. Marissa. Y-you scared me there for a s-"

He didn't get to finish that thought, because a pair of very real, solid metal scales appeared in her hand and she slammed them down on top of his desk. The strange glow vanished from her eyes, as well as the symbol on her forehead, but the manifestation of the actual scales was bad news. For now, it seemed quite content to wobble up and down in a consistent fashion, but if those things skewed to one side and stopped moving…. Her voice was calm and in control, but he knew how quickly that could change. "Something is happening with the Gates of Norlathel. You know I can't feel it when a Gate's power is used, because my internal balance corrects it instantly, but you- you know what's going on, don't you? You always know, though you act dumber than an Ego with half his personality missing. You're going to tell me." It wasn't a command, a prediction, or a request, it was some sort of absolute truth.

"I- Why am I supposed to know?!" He yelled back, in half-defensive shock. "They're the ones who-!"

"YOU WERE THE ONE WHO LED ME TO THEM BACK THEN. YOU KNEW WHAT THEY WERE GOING TO MAKE ME DO." The words were not yelled back, but they boomed around the space anyways. The scales began to tip ever so slightly to one side. The mirrors all around him grew visible spiderweb cracks.

He held up his hands in surrender. "I only knew that they wanted me to bring you there, I swear. You never gave me a chance to explain and apologize." The mirrors glowed red. "Okayokay! I know you don't want to hear any of that, but you have to believe me that I don't know anything about what the other Gates are planning this time. But I can tell you what I've been feeling." More cracks. "NOT emotionally, oh by Norlathel. I meant that stuff that you can't feel about the powers and the collapses and things."

Rissa blinked and the red glow vanished. "Collapses? What're you talking about, what collapses?"

He let out a relieved breath and took a moment to compose himself. The scales hadn't quite righted themselves yet, but they were still wobbling comfortably. He had distracted her from her anger long enough to gain a little control over the situation again. "It's not just when people use a lot of the power of Norlathel, we also feel it when a Gate of Norlathel falls. It means whoever's carrying the oath in their souls has died and released it. I didn't even know that was going to happen, but as soon as I felt it, I knew what it was. I don't think anyone's been using Norlathel's power, at least not in a big way. But three Gates have died already today. For all I know whoever it is hunting Gates down is coming after me next."

Marissa didn't give in, staring straight at him. "What else? I should've known this carnival wasn't just some fun event. What else are you hiding from me, Gwazi?"

He spat it out before she could get much angrier. If that was possible. "There's been a prophecy. Most of the other Gates were given copies of it already, one way or another. Heck, the dragons are probably here because of that prophecy." Gwazi was large enough that even seated he was well on par with Marissa's height, but she had the control in this situation. He rummaged through his pockets to find a crumpled piece of paper with the prophecy written on it and shoved it into her hands. "Here! Take it! I don't know what any of it means anyways." Before she could terrorize him any further into giving out more information, the large Immortal finally completed a hasty teleportation spell and disappeared in front of her eyes. He faintly heard her ask "wait, what dra-" but by then he'd made his escape.

Leaning his sweaty palms against his knees, he found himself out in the open, some distance from his maze. The streets were pretty empty now, which was as much as he should have expected, he supposed. It was shocking people hadn't been trampled to death yet with the dragons coming and people dying. He still wasn't quite sure how the other Gates had died, he had just heard rumors of people picking fights. Letting out another long breath of relief, he stood up and brushed himself off. He would have to wait for Rissa to leave to go back and collect his things and better arm himself in case someone really was coming after him.

"It looks like I got lucky." The high voice was accompanied with a little giggle and he turned around wildly, trying to look for its source. There was a girl. Smaller than him, of course, with her long black hair waving behind her and the blunt edge of a sword lightly sitting on her shoulder. The sword was dripping, but she didn't seem to care. "I wasn't going to go hunting anymore tonight, but it would be a pain to try tracking you down again if I let you go now, especially since you just so conveniently teleported right in front of me. It's almost like it was fate. Don't you think, Gate Number Eight?"

Gwazi shuddered. He may not have been the strongest of Immortals, but he was not the stupidest of them either. Seeing her standing there with a bloody blade and that downright maniacal smile on her face as she talked about some hunt, he knew she'd been killing people, and he was next on her bucket list. "Why are you doing this?" He asked her, trying to distract her somewhat. "Are you the one who killed the other Gates, too?"

"Oh not all of them." She gesticulated with her sword, appearing to care nothing at all for the unpleasant spray that caused. "Just one. And I mean, I guess it wouldn't hurt to tell you why since you're going to die, but who knows what'll happen if I say it out loud. I can't afford to have anyone hearing. Just know that it was all set up a very long time ago, Gwazi. It didn't start with this recent prophecy, and it's not going to end until everything else does."

He backed away from her. Marissa Kellenghan might have had more full power than her, but Anaia Tsukasa was a great deal harder to escape. He couldn't just turn tail and run. And if he didn't, he was toast. He didn't have enough time to try another teleportation spell. His eyes flashed in all directions, looking for an escape route of some kind, an odd thing to be looking for when you were wide out in the open. Anaia simply watched him, waiting for him to make the first move. Panicking, he threw out one hand and yelled, "Chariot of Space!"

Nothing happened. He stared around himself, shocked that that particular piece of magic had not worked. Since it had come into being, the Chariot of Space had never failed anyone who had called on it. The girl in front of him burst into laughter. "Are you an idiot? The Chariot of Space?! I really did do a good job of keeping the identity of its creator secret, didn't I? The Chariot of Space is also called the Shape Thief's chariot, Gwazi. Who do you think the Shape Thief is? I made it to make transportation for everyone easier, so it responds as if it has a mind of its own, but I have always been its true master." Lifting her left hand all the way up, she flippantly said, "Chariot, honey." She was gone in the blink of an eye, and Gwazi looked around everywhere, trying to cobble together some spell to give himself a weapon. Then, he felt a sharp pain from inside, a growing, physical ripping feeling.

He looked down at his own body and saw a sword slash its way free of his torso, before going all the way around and slicing him in two. Anaia emerged between the two halves of his body, drenched in his blood from head to toe. She had used the chariot to transport herself to the EXACT spot he had been. She didn't even bother wiping the blood from her face as she laughed and sang half to herself, "There goes Gate Number Eight!"

Grumpy and his crew had not managed to escape the watchful eye of the former empress Kitti and her retinue while their attention was taken up by the dragons coming from above. The seven of them were being held in a funny tent that screamed of magic, watched by General Winter and that annoying Avian with her. He wasn't really sure where he was, or where the Empress had gone. He mostly just cared about how they were going to get out. They had heard something about the summons to this damn writing-carnival-camp thing or whatever the Galer it was supposed to be because everybody knew about it. They hadn't been invited, but there had been some whispers that it was absolutely mandatory and that had to be for a reason. He and his White Ravens weren't just going to be left to the dogs because they'd been outlawed, unjustly he might add. But trying to fend off a dragon attack and then landing next to two very dead bodies and getting captured by the very people he'd been trying to avoid for the past few years. What kind of justice was this?

Actually, if he was being honest with himself, the dead bodies and getting kicked around by a dragon a bit really weren't as bad as listening to his pesky former protégée, Winter, bickering endlessly with the Avian. His two little watch-dog guards had not shut up since he'd run into them in the first place. In fact, he rather suspected Kitti had sent them to guard him because she was sick of listening to them. She may have also been trying to drive him mad, because he was halfway there. Damn if he wasn't going down without a fight, though.

"Sneezy. Happy." He snapped in a furious whisper at the two closest to him. "We're busting out of here. You two be bait." Happy sneezed and Sneezy instantly started up a complaint, but he shot them a silencing glare. "I can break us free of the magical cage and that barrier around this damn place with my Red Needle, but it will leave a trail. We need someone to be bait so we can get to the outer barrier and break through before they catch us. You, two go first and make sure they BOTH follow you."

"And how are we supposed to do that?" Sneezy asked, nastily.

Grumpy snorted. "What the fuck do you think? Piss them off. It should be easy for you." Pulling a literal red needle from pocket, he began to thread magic through the needle's eye, concentrating hard and squinting at it. The Red Needle was something of a last resort, because it left a golden trail of magic telling their location for MILES, leaving him with the choice to either drop it and discard a useful trump card, or keep running for miles and miles and miles. But hey, this WAS a last resort kind of moment. He needed his sanity.

Poking the fabric of the tent with the tip of the needle, it illuminated the magical mesh that was preventing them from leaving or calling on any kind of teleportation magic. Their giant blackbird steeds locked in with them stirred at the feeling of magic being manipulated. All right. The important thing was shutting off some threads from the source… It was slow going at first, but Grumpy gently began teasing the thread through the network of magic, looping his own magic under and over and under and over until he had outlined a crude shape of an opening with his magic right where the tent's flap was. Pressing the needle to a bit of his magic outlining the door, he closed his eyes, built up his own stores, and shoved a pulse through it. Subtle enough to prevent anyone from noticing, powerful enough to cause the network inside the crude shape to fail and leave them a nice big hole to leave by. The blackbirds flapped excitedly, and he knew that would catch their guards' attention soon.

He hastily urged the other dwarves onto the backs of the birds, then grabbed Sneezy and Happy by the beards. "Go." He grunted, and kicked them both out the opening. Mere moments later, both were being chased down by the two irritated women. Being annoying was all those two were good for, anyways.

Hopping on his own steed with a surprising amount of grace for someone as short and stocky as he was, Grumpy led the four others out of the entrance of the tent. They were already close to the glowing barrier, so they didn't even need to fly and draw attention to themselves. He drew closer to it and tapped his needle against it like he had with the tent's fabric.

"What do you think you're doing?" Asked a woman's disembodied voice. It wasn't Winter or Kitti or that annoying Avian from earlier, but who? He tried looking for the source and failed spectacularly. Ignoring it, he began to get to work. "I asked you what you think you're doing, dwarf." It demanded, not sounding particularly upset.

He looked around again, but there was still nobody there. It wouldn't hurt to answer, if it would allow him to do what he needed to do. Sneezy and Happy's birds had probably made it out and were already looking to pick them up. "What does it look like I'm doing?" He grunted. "I'm getting through this barrier so we can leave this deathtrap and go home."

"Home to Galer?" It asked again nosily. "That's a nice needle, you've got there, you know."

He ground his teeth together in annoyance. "Yes. Home to Galer, and yes I know it's a nice needle, lady. I'm the one who made it."

"You can't go home to Galer." She told him matter-of-factly. "The dragons came here because their mountains got destroyed. No mountains, no entrance to Galer, no going back home."

He stopped what he was doing and attempted to stare at his approximation of the source of the voice. It came from somewhere the next time it spoke. "But I know a place where you CAN go. Even when people are around and not trapped here, it's empty and uninhabited. Even if they can trace you, they won't follow you there." How did she know they could be traced? All of Grumpy's instincts told him not to listen to the voice, but anywhere no one would follow them was a good place to be. He had been born and raised in Galer, he didn't know where else they were going to try and hide anyways.

He went back to threading a nice hole through the big barrier. "Okay, fine. Tell me where this place is and how to get there." He grumped.

To his surprise, a map popped into his lap. "It's called the Grand Cliffs of Shosing. It's here on the map, and you are here." A little red dot indicated where the cliffs were, and a golden one for where they were. "On the backs of those Avians, it shouldn't take too long to get there. They're magically fast, right?"

At this point, Grumpy had had quite enough of this mysterious stranger who knew way too much about who they were and was being just a little bit too helpful, and if he hadn't been finished with his "sewing project," he would've tried to find her and shoo her away. As it was, though, with a barrier this strong, the effects of his needle wouldn't last forever. "Fine." He snarled. "Just don't follow us. C'mon men, let's go." The White Ravens swooped through the hole one after another, their last two members not far behind.

Peregrine and Winter managed to chase the last two dwarves to the edge just in time to see them zip through the barrier like it wasn't there. "How did they do that?!" Peregrine stopped at the edge, still flapping wildly.

"I forgot he probably has that needle of his." Winter intoned back, coldly. "It's a magical item that allows him to weave through a shield, barrier, or cage of any kind, even magical, as long as he has a little time."

"Uh…. And you didn't think it was important to check to make sure he didn't have this thing on him?!" Peregrine yelled over at her. "Ugh. Whatever, never mind. You go back and find Kitti and tell her they've escaped. I'll cha-"

"You don't need to do that you know."

"Nemo." Pere really hated it when Nemo appeared and disappeared like that. The girl was leaning on the barrier, fixing her brown ponytail. "Oh gods, don't do that. And what do you mean we don't need to do that? Tell Kitti or chase the bandits? Both seem fairly important."

Nemo laughed. "No, you definitely need to tell Kitti and Astaroth and Jorick and all the other Imperatrices, but you don't need to chase them. He left a glowing trail of magic as if he wanted to be found. There's no reason to go after him when we don't know what the Princeps Imperatores want us to do about it just yet. I'll guard the entrance so nobody slips out, you guys go back and find everybody else. I'm pretty sure they're scattered everywhere, so it'll take a bit to spread the news to the right people."

Peregrine didn't trust Nemo. She never had, from the moment they had started working together. Battles won together usually changed this, but there was something in her heart that kept convincing her that there was something not quite right about the other Imperatrix. Her advice SOUNDED sound, and she'd never led them astray before, but that nagging doubt would not fully leave. She considered it silently for a bit, but decided to follow it after all. She was right about the trail at least. With Pere's sharp, Avian eyes she could even see the glimmer of magic not even starting to fade, leading off into the distance. "Alright. C'mon, Winter." She said, "I guess we should trust this to Nemo."

The General didn't seem any more comfortable about the arrangement than she was, and even less pleased to be ordered around, but both left without complaint. Nemo waited for them to leave, and as soon as they were out of sight, she flicked a finger and closed the barrier up without an ounce of effort, fading out of existence as she did so.

Astaroth and Kitti had left the rest of their Imperatores to watch their various unexpected guests while they began to usher the remaining stragglers inside and clean the streets. It would likely take the rest of the night to fully remove the dung and litter from the ground. After the events of the day, the "carnival spirit" had been thoroughly and quite easily crushed. The two of them walked back to the gate, cleaning as they went, and when they reached it, both laid their hands on the barrier. Astaroth hesitated. "Are you sure we should do this, Kitti?" He asked, seriously. "It was supposed to be a last resort, and without Jorick here…."

She gave him a tired, but confident smile, and nodded, her soft voice soothing. "Too much has happened in one day. If we leave things be, there's going to be a panic."

The large man didn't seem convinced, but he gave a sigh and closed his eyes. The whole barrier glowed brightly, outlining itself as an opaque dome of golden light, and when it faded again, the people everywhere inside the carnival began to drop, falling to the ground asleep. From wherever she was or was not, Nemo grinned in satisfaction.

The two Princeps Imperatores went back to cleaning the carnival, this time in relative peace, but they oddly, almost unconsciously seemed to avoid the main street and the two dead people who had caused so much trouble earlier that day. Two men were standing by the cordoned-off area, looking down at the cold bodies of Tryshtopher and Joan. Neither spoke for a long time, but one, the one with blue hair, stepped over the yellow tape and walked over to Joan, crouching down and putting his hand on her forehead. A flash of her memories came flooding in through the physical contact, and he easily ordered them chronologically.

~~

Ah. This was a scene he recognized. Joan D'Dark was standing in a circle with several other Immortals on top of the mountain Norlathel, the man himself standing in the middle of the circle. She looked around her somewhat in awe, though most of the others were tense in anticipation. Some of the greatest first-generation Immortals were gathered here. How second-generations like she and Trysh had ended up part of this group was more than a little amazing. Jorick the Separating and the Bringer of Fates had been obvious choices, but there were also some others that she had not expected to see there. The kraken, a creature known for his unfriendly nature, and the Immortal Hunter, for instance, cared nothing for the rest of Immortal-kind. Why would they be here to take this terrible burden? Could they even be trusted with it? She, Trysh, and Gwazi – a second-generation of the God of Reflections – had all volunteered to be here because the council had said no others were willing, but volunteers or not, this was a great honor.

They all huddled tightly around Norlathel and put a hand on his shoulders or head, solemnly repeating the oath he asked them to take, an oath of immense power to become as sealed gates, one for each god, to hold against the tide with the power of Norlathel, Only Creation of Both Life and Death, till the time should come that they should die and those that had become the Dark Gods be dealt with for good. She gasped as a strange new power flooded into her, occupying a space next to her soul that she would soon grow used to. The euphoria of it lasted only a second, as that same power burned and thrashed, drawing in and containing a god. It took a moment for the god's new prison to seal it in, but that brief time felt like an eternity of agony while it lasted. When it ended, she, and several of the others, collapsed to the ground, exhausted from the effort.

The memory shifted and changed like smoke and Joan was now in her home, holding tightly onto the prone form of her youngest sister. The memory was devoid of proper emotion, since dead people didn't contain emotions very well, but it was clear it was meant to be a painful one. Tears were streaming down her cheeks as she stared up at a girl who looked to be in her teens, soft brown hair tied up in a practical fashion. The bodies of her entire family were strewn across the ground all around her. This was not the memory he'd been looking for, either, but the importance of it had practically forced him to watch it. "Who are you? Why have you done this to my family?" Joan sobbed, voice cracking. "What have we ever done to you?"

The girl clearly felt less strongly about the whole matter. "Me? I'm nobody. You probably don't remember me, but we've met before. That's not what's important, though. I killed you D'Darks because you deserve to be slaughtered. You are the creations of the God of Darkness. We Gates were made to seal away the darkness, and you D'Darks are just a part of that. All of you are like the legacy of the Dark Gods. This is simply justice."

That justification was utter insanity, and Joan knew she would never be able to understand it. It took a bit for her to stop crying enough to suck in a shaky breath and ask, "Are you going to kill me, then?" There was no fear there, just resignation and maybe a little – no, a lot – of anger.

"Of course not. You're a Gate, now. We're not ready to deal with that god being released just yet. Someday we will, though, and you will have outlived your usefulness." The shameless murderer looked up and away from her, as if thinking wistfully of other things. "You and a couple others. But the task to kill you will fall to someone else. I'll be there to help, of course, but you won't remember me until then. No, until then all you'll remember is coming home and finding them all dead. No revenge for you, no closure, not for thousands of years. It's what you deserve for your arrogance, little dark one."

Screaming with unspeakable rage, Joan shot forward, summoning a massive sword to pierce through the invader's chest. It never reached. The girl vanished into nothingness, and the last of the D'Darks looked around herself, wondering who she'd been attacking, who it was that had killed her family. She would wonder that for a very, very long time.

E.L. skipped through many of the years that followed. He was about to skip another one that seemed like it should be a mundane scene, but it held an odd sort of glow to it. That was always the mark of an important memory. He found Joan sitting on a rather normal-looking rock next to a very normal-looking guy under a normal-looking sky. Nothing particularly exciting about this one. The boy next to her, though, looked remarkably similar to the woman who had killed Joan. This had to have been her brother, Tednise, whose death had caused the rift between the Turtles and Joan for the past thousand years. He listened only idly to the conversation, until the girl's voice sharpened, suddenly, as if someone was magnifying it. Another signifier of an important moment of the past.

"I'm a D'Dark. Everyone thinks we were villains. No one even came to the funeral." She laughed, but the sound was painfully forced. "Sometimes I think they might be right, you know, with all the monsters we've had to kill and the mortals when they were… feral and everything. It's kind of…" She trailed off and laughed again, shaking her head as if to free it of the morbid thoughts. "Never mind." The boy looked at her without smiling, and she seemed to grow awkward as he let the silence stretch. "I mean, it was a long time ago. It's not that important anymore, it was just a thought, Ted."

"They're wrong." He said, voice brooking no argument. "You're not allowed to talk to them anymore."

That made her laugh for real, then. She punched him in the shoulder, voice practically sparkling. "You don't get to boss me around, Mr. Turtle."

He grinned at her, but turned the tables on her almost instantly, face growing serious. "You know I love you, right?"

The blood rushed to Joan's face before she could stop it, and she almost fell off the rock. "W-wh-y-I-."

He laughed again and grabbed one of her hands to steady her before she fell, wrapping an arm around her to draw her closer at the same time. "I love you because you're kind and because you're strong." His words were soft, almost whispered. "I love you because you're beautiful. I love you when you laugh, and I love you when you cry, because when you laugh it's like the world suddenly becomes brighter, but when you cry I know it's because you have a heart that is touched by what you have seen. I love you because the horrors in your life have not made you forget that the world is still worth fighting for, even if it has left you with nothing. I also just love you because I love you, and I don't have any better reason than that." He leaned closer and kissed her. She closed her eyes as he did it, and a tear slipped from one of her eyes. "So you, Joan of the Dark, do not ever get to think you're villain. You don't ever get to think you're not good enough for me or for the power of Norlathel or for anything at all. You're, most of all, not allowed to listen to anyone who tells you that your family deserved what they got. And I will always boss you around about all of that whether you like it or not."

He grinned at her again, and Joan burst into full-fledged tears, to his shock and dismay.

The next memory came into focus almost immediately after, and it was this that E.L. had really wanted to see. Tednise was beside her side, again, the two of them advancing towards a cave. They were on some kind of mountain, but it definitely wasn't Norlathel. It looked to be Galer. They were probably creeping on the cave of a major monster. They had made a name for themselves back in the day for dealing with a number of troublesome monsters, until this incident, during which, Tryshtopher claimed, Joan had killed her brother. He didn't see Trysh anywhere near the two of them. Tednise, the promising heir to the Turtle family, had famously inherited some special control over a plant known as the soul-sucking weeds, which existed nowhere except under the control of the Turtle's line, since they had mingled with the some of the creations of the God of Plants.

E.L. watched passively as Joan and Tednise went inside. What happened next was a rather dull series of fighting. The monster they were fighting this time was strong, though. It mirrored Ted's abilities, taking control of the soul-suckers and taunting the man as he sent them in Joan's direction. In a desperate, and probably futile effort, Ted managed to wrest Joan's sword from her and slam it into his own gut. She screamed, the monster laughed, and Joan blasted it with the power of Norlathel before it could get even close to copying her instead. The soul-sucking weeds sprouted from Ted's body, and Joan ran without being able to take her sword from his body. By E.L.'s guess, the sword was one of the magical ones the D'Darks summoned instead of carried, and would eventually disappear, but its magical signature would have been unmistakable, especially for someone so close to her.

He sighed and was about to leave her memories, assured with some relief that there had been no foul play concerning the feud between the Turtles and the last of the D'Darks, but one of her very last memories tugged at him, almost demanding to be looked at, much like the memory of her family's death. He obliged it and it exploded into view.

Joan was a short distance from the food booth, having left it to head for the stage perhaps, but then a girl caught her eye. She turned her head and saw the Imperatrix Nemo, the same practical pony tail and fresh young features. It was the woman who had killed her family. Her parents and her sister were dead because of this girl. Joan's eyes widened at the memory that had been taken from her so long ago. "HEY!" She yelled and went after the girl at top speed.

Nemo weaved through the crowd, letting Joan keep full sight of her, and not working very hard to make sure she didn't catch up. It was almost as if she wanted to be caught. In this kind of a crowd, the warrior couldn't comfortably draw her blade, but she managed to fight through to where it was a little clearer and made a beeline for the other woman. It was almost as if Nemo was waiting for her…. She reached out to grab the Imperatrix by the lapel, but Nemo got to her first, shoving her with all her might so that she crashed into someone behind her. When Joan opened her eyes again, her family's murderer was gone, and instead Tryshtopher was standing over her, read to kill her for a crime she had not committed, and a horrible misunderstanding she had not had the heart to correct.


~~

E.L. gently lifted his hand from the dead girl's forehead, no longer wishing to see any more of her memories now that he had found the most important piece of information.

"Ano Taku." The serious, white-haired man who had followed him over the line and was crouched beside him looked over at his eternally cheerful companion expressionlessly. He had been by E. L. Anthill's side for many thousands of years, when there were still wars raging in the world, and he had seen him do things that had remained unknown and unremembered by all but a few. "There's a thing about anthills." Ano Taku flinched and refused to meet his eyes, but the other Immortal acted as though he hadn't seen it. "On top, it seems like nothing more than a little mound with a hole on top of it, but I opened one up, once. Pulled every grain of sand away and you know what I found? Hundreds, maybe thousands of ants scurrying around. I'd have thought they were angry with me, you see, but they don't really get angry, so I felt nothing from them. It's refreshing. Thousands of creatures frantically running but not a single emotion clouding my perception, and for the first time I could see what was going to happen more clearly than I ever had before. It was a large foot, destroying their entire world, all the way down to the deepest of their caverns. So that's what I did. I crushed them with my foot, until there was a crater in the ground and for as long as their carefully crafted little ant caves stretched, the ground was full of holes. It wasn't anybody's fault, and it didn't make me feel good, but for some reason it had to be done. It was so inevitable a thing that it was like I was simply watching myself do it." This was one story Ano had never heard before, but he knew what was coming next, and his whole body tensed, waiting for the deadly omen the Bringer of Fates, Eontana Lamprophis, always spoke when something monumentally bad was about to happen.

"Tomorrow's supposed to be an anthill kind of day."

He turned his head to stare at his long-time friend, jaw clenching, only to find E.L.'s face contorted into an unusual expression of pain and rage, "But I don't really care about what is supposed to happen anymore."
 
A History of Iwaku by Herzi of Querzi (Abbr Ver.)

Excess Exposition Chapter II - The Mid-Age

Now, some time before the Goddess of Death was shut away with other remaining gods or killed, she gave her breath of life to the last immortal creatures - the dragons, and it is probably these that I would say heralded in the Mid-Age, as we know it, or the Age of Immortals, as it has been erroneously called. This is not because the dragons were particularly important, in fact they are probably the creatures who have had the least impact in our history, but because as soon as the gods drew away from Iwaku, the dragons were the ones whose behavior changed the most. I attempted to slog through a dragon physiology book once, but it was horribly dull and the author left a disclaimer in tiny font saying that most of the shit he was spouting were his own theories since nobody actually knows anything about how dragons work, so I'm not going to try and explain why they started coming down from their isolated mountain and periodically raiding Immortal settlements for random trinkets, but that is what they did. You might expect this to result in some angry Immortals, but it didn't, for the same reason anyone who calls the Mid-Age the Age of Immortals clearly doesn't know his ass from a hole in the ground. A few pompous historians I've read have made long-winded justifications about why it should be referred to as the Age of Immortals, but beyond the select few who helped end this 'dark time in history,' the Immortals mostly spent the Mid-Age doing their civic duty of dying in droves.

There is this long-standing belief among us mortals that Immortals are extremely hard for us to kill because of their magical abilities and physical prowess, but this is simply not true. As I said in my previous chapter, mortals were originally built to take down gods. Once all the gods were dead, locked away, or gone presumably grieving in secret places, we mortals didn't really seem to notice and went right on killing the closest things resembling gods – the Immortals. It is true Immortals do not age once they reach a certain developmental point. From what I can tell, it is also true they were made with more magic in one of their pinkies than our most powerful magicians use in their entire lives, but that hadn't really been on purpose, and they had not been made or born during a time when anybody killed each other, the Immortal Hunter aside. As such, Immortals were largely peaceful and neither knew how to use their magic to fight, nor how to band together against the horde of mortals that were not only increasing their numbers at rates mind-blowing for Immortals, but also getting better and better at killing foes inherently stronger than themselves. Granted, the Immortals from this time that are still alive today are indeed exceptionally difficult to kill, but my guess is that that is because the mortals didn't really leave survivors by chance. The ones who made it out of the slaughter were the ones who learned how to kill, how to defend themselves, or how to hide. Among the most prominent of those who chose to kill were the Immortal Hunter, of course, and a female single-fathered Immortal called the Non-Existent, but they are not important figures in this Age beyond serving as population control for the mortals (the kind of population control that people make horror movies about now).

It did not take long for the mortals to wipe out the Immortals easier to kill, and while some continued to hunt the rest of them down, most began turning on each other. One Immortal who signs his works with 'the Formless' begins most of his writings during this age, and his words describing this time have always been difficult for me to read. In one passage he writes, "I spent most days wandering, trying to find the rare spot where the ground was not covered in bodies. It was not easy. And where there were no bodies, the stains their blood had left on the ground only became more visible. I wish my words were merely words, but the mortals did not care to dispose of their dead, and most of the Immortals had grown too afraid to do so for ours. Many had died killing each other, but as time dragged on, the mortals' careless abandon led to a new and more frightening predator – disease. Those of us who least feared the mortals took to burning down whole settlements simply to rid the ground of the bodies and the air of the sickness. I would always watch till every last crude little house turned to ash. It is hard not to pity even these monsters when you listen to them scream as I sometimes spent hours at a time doing. The smell of burning flesh taints every breath I take to this day." Some believe the Formless is simply another name for the Non-Existent, but gender pronouns aside, it is always this passage that convinces me otherwise.

Safe to say, this was nobody's idea of a good time, but it was also, thankfully, the shortest of the three Ages. Only a year or two into the widespread disease-caused deaths, a small number of the surviving Immortals began to band together for talks about solutions to the problem of the mortals. The Formless summarized each talk in a letter addressed to someone he refers to as "the Daughter." It is difficult to tell if these letters ever actually reached their recipient, because the anthology I found them in explains that the letters were originally discovered stashed away in an old chest with no address written on the dated envelopes. The content, however, is a wealth of information. Though he remains almost intentionally vague about the speakers, most of the Immortals during this time appeared to agree that the mortals had to be dealt with, but they seemed to be conflicted over how they were going to go about it. A number of ideas were thrown around, but for the most part there was the "kill em all while they're down" camp, and the "try and reform them" camp. As you can imagine, neither alternative was very popular, but most people seemed to feel that killing them all was, while perhaps more unpleasant, a much easier option. Only about five of the Immortals felt the second option was even magically possible.

Few though the proponents of the "reform" plan were, the letters I read implied somehow that these few held a certain amount of authority in the talks, including the Formless himself. I'm not sure if they were all first-generations, or if something else made them special somehow, but they overrode the objections of the hundred or so others the Formless recorded at these talks. He quotes only one other Immortal verbatim, so far as I can tell, only because their interaction appears to make him laugh. "When I had explained our plan, I suggested we also enlist, and in fact direly needed, the help of one of my two fellow creations, the one you happen to be more fond of. This instantly caused an uproar, but all fell silent when she took this as her cue to enter the room, though she had thus far avoided our gatherings. I did send one of myself to persuade her privately some weeks before, but she had sent no reply, and I was not sure if her response here would be favorable. She addressed me only, and her words were thus, 'You smug little bastard, you want to mess with my death for the sake of your precious little mortals? Go drown in a tree.' She did not, in fact, summon a tree, so I could tell that she had found sufficient justification to help. I'm sure you would have trembled with me in laughter had you seen her cantankerous façade then. I did not tell her about the role the Keeper of the Scales will have to play yet, though, and I am not sure she will continue offering her help once this is discovered."

I still haven't been able to figure out who this quotee was or what she actually did to help, but the Keeper of the Scales he mentions goes most famously by the title Dismantler of Wars, a name which any native Iwakuan should know. For those of you less familiar, she is an Immortal revered more than the gods, said to appear whenever a war threatens, and powerful enough to destroy both parties and rebuild everything destroyed in the aftermath. In the following Age of Mortals, not a single war in Iwaku lasts longer than a year once she starts getting involved, but I will drone on a lot more about that in the next chapter. I won't bore you with the details of this fancy plan to save the world, which the Formless writes down in full specifics, though again he seems reluctant to name who is involved in it. For some reason, the main role needed to be the Keeper of the Scales (which he writes as if it's an obvious decision), and what she had to do was give the mortals something I suppose we'd call a conscience nowadays. The Formless describes it as "the mind, heart, and personal will the gods did not believe they needed when first they were created." It seems strange to us that any of our ancestors would be made without such normal things, but let me repeat for the third time that our ancestors were basically just god-killing machines. From every single piece of Immortal writing I have ever read, this apparently meant they didn't need to think about anything besides killing stuff.

In order to achieve this, however, there was a cost the Keeper of the Scales was not told about until the last moment - that cost being the life of every last god in existence. I am not sure if this affected the gods locked away, but it certainly did not seem to spare the gods who had hidden themselves in their far off places. I did find a scrap of paper tucked in the Formless's publication and written in a very different hand. Though it's impossible to tell if it's a credible source, it's much more colorful than the dry list of the gods that came to die that the Formless adds in his official notes, so I include it instead. "[It was] weird seeing them coming [like] cattle. One after another. Floating lights. [S/he] didn't say [they were] gonna die. Lights. Us. Die? [The] third way to kill a god. [This was] all their fault anyways. Give civil[ity] of [the] soul for [the] civ[ility] of soul. Need all 3, and bal. Not… sad?"

As you can see, the note was written in shorthand, and it took a bit for me to fill in some of the blanks (the last two sentences are borderline incomprehensible, but I left them cause they seem to mean something), but suffice to say they needed the souls of the gods to compensate for whatever we mortals were missing from ours. It worked, and from what the Formless wrote, not one god was left alive. All had to be sacrificed, and even then it almost wasn't enough, except for some extra power that he refuses to elaborate on. Multiple writings from various Immortals show that this led to a general outcry. Most wrote that it was the highest act of evil that had ever been committed and ever would be again. The Formless himself did not seem very happy about what had to be done, but his letters to the Daughter continue describing the certainty he projected to the others that this had been the right course of action. I don't have words better than his own to describe the material point:

"Some weeks back, one among the talks asked me why the mortals were worth saving, saying they were no different from the mindless, humanoid beasts that we had done our best to avoid up till now. What made these new creations worth all the pain and trouble it would cost us to help them instead of destroy them, when they themselves had cost us so much? I could not trust myself to speak, for I had not really thought of the answer. I could only argue that it was our duty to stop the blood, and the question got lost within the other arguments.

"It was not till later that I found the answer from a rather unexpected source: The mortals were us. They were us as we might have been, and us as we were in that day. We killed to survive as if we had no other purpose, because they had taught us to fear death. The days of peace that we had known were not because we were inherently better than them, but because we had been given the chance to be. They had been created almost identical to us.

"I know you will not really understand, but also made of parts of the gods as we were, I believed that they did hold the capacity to be more than this world's beasts, if only they had the freedom to decide. That was why that Immortal had agreed to help, even though she has great love for the Keeper of the Scales. I recognized it in her eyes when we saw the gods come to die, that she did not feel she had been given the choice of whether or not to kill, because some sort of death had always awaited her if she did not. It is only now I wonder if that was why you bothered with her when you dislike killing so much. Did you, of all people, guess what the rest of us had never imagined?"

It seems to me that the Formless was rather sentimental about the whole thing, considering what happened in the subsequent Age, but I'll concede to being grateful for being alive and free to choose to write long books about boring things rather than being a mindless killing machine. Whether this was truly good or bad, accounts of the Mid-Age all agree that its end came when the Keeper of the Scales traded the lives of the gods for the "betterment" of all mortals, and it was this incident that gave her the name Dismantler of the Great War, which changed to "Wars" plural much later on in history. From what I can gather, what followed was a sudden period of "restoration of the land" that I suspect has to do with the mysterious Imvadrim, though that name does not come into official records until the Description of the Earth Mother and Her Children was written almost two centuries later by an Immortal who calls him or herself the Mountain-Bound.
 
Chapter 4 - Holey Pokie

Immortal? No. We do not call your kind Immortal. We call you the Frozen, for you do not change. You do not forget. You drown in memories as if they had just happened. Your people hold old grudges, little one. Here. Let me show you…

The night was the kind of insufferably quiet that most people would've described as the calm before the storm. As a matter of fact, it was a lot more like the storm that nobody was awake to hear, and this insufferable silence that said nothing at all about what was actually happening continued into the morning. Kitti was exhausted. No, actually she was annoyed; she left the good-natured exhaustion to Astaroth. After Peregrine had told her of the White Ravens' escape, she had wanted nothing more than to chase full after them, but there had simply been too much work to do. It had taken a great deal of magic even with their various vassals to clean the streets of all the dung, then identify and transport everyone to the lodgings that had initially been assigned them. The neat rows of tent cabins were now full of peacefully snoring people, thanks to them.

And then there were the guests they couldn't account for. Pahndora, Brie, the dragons, and the other Immortals that had stayed housed in the tent had been unaffected by the sleeping spell that had been woven into the barrier that protected the carnival, and that was to be expected, but there were others. Holmer and Cherilyn of the Shire should have returned from their errand with the Witch of the Water some time ago, but neither hide nor hair of them had been seen as the sleeping people were carried away. Likewise, a handful of influential Immortals were missing, not to mention a rather random mortal and both Jorick and Nemo. With the two extra Immortals they had found randomly dead in the streets, it brought their death tally up to four Immortals and one mortal in one day. The real question, and the one that was currently bringing the crease to her delicate brows, was why. What was going on? Immortals blended magnificently into the ranks of the mortals, but Kitti was raised to know better than to think they were at all similar.

Creatures that did not die, especially OLD creatures that did not die like the first-generations, fundamentally could not connect with creatures that did. Whatever was happening, she was certain it had something to do with whatever a bunch of meddlesome Immortals had planned for what they thought to be good reasons, or at the very least for their own amusement. Trouble, the lot of them. They were no better than monsters, playing with life and death as if it was some grand game. What was worse was that she could tell they thought she, and the other Imperatores, could just be manipulated like that, as if the mortals didn't know better and couldn't fight for themselves. She didn't know what was going on, no, but she was definitely going to find out, and she knew it all had to start with Jorick.

Her friend had been acting odd lately. Odder than usual, that was. In the days before he'd suddenly turned into a chocolate dog, he'd been restless and unhappy, and she had, on occasion, overheard him talking to Astaroth about strange nightmares. He described in detail dreams of standing in front of a field of trees and watching them warp into enormous monsters he'd never seen before. Often there were people with him. For some, he had seemed to know who they were while in the dreams, but when he woke up, their identities escaped him. At other times one of the other Imperatores was with him. The dreams had gotten worse, and then one day a dog made completely of chocolate had appeared in their meeting hall. She and Astaroth had waited and waited to start the meeting, and when they'd asked where Jorick was, Nemo had pointed straight at him and said, "What're you talking about? That's Jorick."

They hadn't been rulers for very long, and it wasn't like she knew the man very well, but she had trusted him implicitly. When Nemo had told them all a few days later that they had needed to assemble on the edge of the Creacon Forest, because Jorick had said he'd hidden something important there, she had gone without complaint. Now, though, she was rather curious as to why he'd really hidden this prophecy in the abandoned forest of Creacon, where he had gotten it in the first place, and why he had suggested a carnival like this or the barrier with the sleeping spell built-in.

The strange thing was that she couldn't seem to find him at all, nor any of his Egos, nor even his late interpreter, Nemo. She pressed her lips together, an uneasiness in her heart. It hadn't struck her as odd that Nemo was the only one who could understand Jorick after his transformation, because they had always seemed to understand each other better than most. She now had to wonder if this faith in them had been misguided. The problem was that she had needed them. Her father had died, his trusted general Grumpy had been going on murdering rampages, and the monsters in Galer had started acting strangely. No one had ever seen the monsters band together and attack settlements as a unit. Attack their mines and places of strength intentionally, as if meaning to weaken them structurally. She'd been crowned Empress for less than a month before she was utterly swamped. When her childhood friend, the Duke Astaroth, had introduced Jorick and Pahndora to her as trusted advisors, she hadn't had time to question it. When her beloved maid Brie had done something similar with Nemo, it hadn't even crossed her mind as suspicious. She should have known better, but all three of them had immediately made themselves indispensable.

A hand touched her shoulder, and Kitti flinched, instinctively raising a hand as if to protect herself, but it was just Astaroth; both he and Peregrine were watching her with concern. "I've been calling you." He told her, gravely.

"Oh." She brushed a lock of her light hair out of her face. "I'm sorry. What were you saying?" The three of them were standing in front of the area Grumpy and his bandits had escaped from, and she realized she'd been zoning out as Astaroth checked to make sure it really had mended itself properly. They probably should have done it earlier, but Peregrine and Winter had told her Nemo was watching it, and that Red Needle of Grumpy's was temporary against stronger spells like this massive barrier, which they had spent a few days preparing. It was a menial task, and everything else had been taken care of, so she'd just relaxed a bit.

"Are you alright?" He leaned down a bit so that his eyes were level to hers, a habit he'd taken to when he'd first started growing so much taller than her at age 13. That hadn't been more than four years ago, but it felt like an age. It also served to make it more difficult for Peregrine to hear him, allowing her a little privacy.

She smiled at him reassuringly, her long-time friend giving her a little extra peace of mind. "I'm perfectly alright. Just thinking. What was it you were trying to tell me?"

He shook his head slightly, to suggest it hadn't been too important compared to her well-being, but raised his voice and spoke to both her and Peregrine. "Just saying the trail left by the Red Needle should last for maybe a week. He put a lot of power into it this time. It doesn't seem like he's heading towards Galer, though. He must have seen the mountains get destroyed."

The former Empress pursed her lips, the cogs in her head clearly turning. "Then it's even more important we get him back. I'd like to know a little more about what destroyed the entrance to Galer, if the dragons were telling the truth. Do you have any idea where he is heading, if not Galer? We can't let him leave Iwaku." Peregrine shifted uncomfortably, and Astaroth seemed unable to speak for a moment, causing her to actually stop and properly give the two of them a look. "What is it?" The other two Imperatores hadn't passed through the barrier, but a little tracking spell to determine where the Red Needle's trail led shouldn't have been too difficult.

"It seems like they're heading to Anaia's Cliffs." He told her uneasily. That got her attention. "They're not there yet, but it seems they know where they're going because they're making practically a direct line for it." Kitti's alarmed grey eyes met his, and she realized he was staring at her with a similar expression of worry. Peregrine, for her part, was having difficulty looking at either of them at all. None of the Imperatores had really been concerned about the Immortal Hunter until they'd decided to overthrow the previous rulers, but unlike the others, the Avian was a native of the Overlands, as the Galerians called the rest of Iwaku. Her people had inhabited one of the last forests before the desolation of the Dreaded Cliffs. She had been raised with stories about those cliffs, and none of them were good.

Kitti shook her head, blonde curls bouncing with the violent motion of denial. "Grumpy has never been outside of Galer before, he shouldn't even know where that is."

Peregrine interjected, still refusing to look at either of them, voice flat. "Nothing survives there. Does he know that?"

"It is possible." Astaroth responded, dully. "He was a good general. It was his job to study old battles and the lay of the lands of Iwaku." The Immortal Hunter was nowhere near as well-known in Galer as the Nonexistent, but they had their stories, too. He turned to Kitti again. "I was thinking perhaps something happened to Holmer and Cherilyn. Maybe he got attracted to their magic." He spoke dubiously, sounding more like he was trying to convince himself.

Kitti almost wished it was that simple, even if it meant something had gone wrong. "It's too far away for even Grumpy to sense something like that. The carnival was easy to track because it was a large concentration of magic. The two of them are less noticeable." Try as she might to think of some other reason for him to have made a beeline to that area, no ready explanation came to mind for what could be going on. She found herself worrying her bottom lip, and forced herself to stop. She didn't want Peregrine to see any signs of weakness, especially since she was no longer sure who she could trust. She tugged lightly on Astaroth's lapel, pulling him slightly away from the other Imperatrix. "What do you think is going on, Astaroth? Really. Do you think the pandemic actually has anything to do with the prophecy? Why did Jorick seem to know so much about it?" She searched his face, praying he could still be trusted, as she had trusted him for so long.

What she saw relieved her. His eyes were filled with a genuine mix of doubt and confusion. "I don't know." It was all he had to say, and Kitti couldn't blame him for not adding to that statement. It pretty much summed up her own thoughts and feelings on the matter. The longer she ruled, the more she felt convinced she didn't know anything after all.

"We have to find him." She said. They both knew she wasn't talking about Grumpy, even though finding him had been the topic that had started the conversation.

"I know." He replied just as gravely as before. "I'm sorry. I really thought he could be trusted."

"That doesn't matter now." She brushed off his apology, secure again in the knowledge that he was on her side. Letting him go, she checked on Peregrine, who was eyeing them anxiously. She didn't want to suspect the poor girl, who had initially been sent as almost a sacrifice in exchange for the Galerians' help in killing off the monsters in her area, but Kitti had figured out upon ascending the throne of Galer that what she wanted only rarely aligned with what she had to do. Now she was responsible not only for Galer, if there was a Galer to go back to, but for all of Iwaku. She drew closer to the Avian. "The scream of the Red Needle is strong enough to last a few days, normally, but it's never been seen in the Overlands. Keep watch of it."

Peregrine gave the slightest frown, and Kitti worried for a second that she was going to object for one reason or another, but she kept her mouth shut. That was almost more worrisome.

"Is something the matter?" The Empress didn't change her smile.

The problem was a lot smaller than she'd expected. "Oh. You called it a scream. I wasn't sure what you meant for a moment."

It was easy to forget, at times, the things Peregrine didn't know because she had joined them after the fall of Grumpy. Kitti relaxed slightly. "Ah." She spoke quickly, keeping her explanation as short as possible. "White ravens are carrion birds in Galer." The birds were not strictly carrion birds alone, but the Living Dead that were their staple apparently tasted a lot more like rotting flesh than live ones, and they were known for waiting for a battle to be over to feed. They would prevent those trying to clear the battlefield and sit on the bodies until they were rotted enough for their liking. "Galerians have an army to fight the monsters, and Grumpy was the best at leading it, but after my father died, he went mad and began to murder villagers as well." At least, she assumed her father's death had driven him mad. She never really had figured out why he'd begun his murder sprees. She didn't flinch as she talked about it, but it wasn't pleasant remembering the way Grumpy's crew had left bodies behind after stripping villages of their valuables and burning the rest down. Grumpy himself had never taken anything if the reports were accurate. She didn't think it was valuables he was interested in. "The white ravens learned to follow them, so that's why they're called the White Ravens."

"Even though they ride blackbirds." Peregrine finished for her, silently urging for her to continue.

"Yes." Kitti said, with a smile and a nod. "The first hundred lives he killed had been spent to make his Red Needle, which can disrupt the magical flow of anything if used correctly. It's a powerful magic." She didn't know where he had gotten the recipe for such a thing, but he certainly hadn't come up with it himself. Now she had to wonder if that was another one of those not-so-coincidental coincidences making a nuisance of themselves in her life. "It needs sacrifices. In exchange, it leaves a trail we think is caused by the resentment of the victims needed to make it. So sometimes we call it their scream." That was all the explanation Peregrine needed, so Kitti continued matter-of-factly. "We can't chase Grumpy for now, so keep watch, Pere, and send a tracing spell down the line once in a while to make sure they don't go somewhere else."

Peregrine flapped her wings twice. "Why can't we chase him now?"

Kitti sighed and looked at Astaroth. "He can't leave Iwaku from the Cliffs even if he does survive there, so he's less important than whoever is killing all these people. That comes first." She said nothing about who she suspected might be involved, but tapped lightly on Pere's shoulder reassuringly and smiled softly. "You have the best eyes of us, Pere. I'm counting on you."

She received a serious nod in reply. Only time would tell if she had made a mistake when she'd elevated Peregrine's status from servant to Imperatrix.

Chocolate Jorick looked this way and that, trying to sense more of his Egos, not thinking too hard about the woman carrying him. Madelyn hadn't let go of him all night long, running about wherever he had pointed her. She hadn't said very much either, but the look on her face told him that she was worried. His various Egos had been found scattered around the carnival, industriously helping to clean poop or move people, but when they saw him, they hadn't needed any explanation or convincing and had immediately followed. It must have been a strange sight, a very distressed woman carrying a small dog made of chocolate being followed by 17 identical, mustachioed men. He had been having some trouble finding the remaining few. By his reckoning, the only ones left were Number 1, Number 8, Number 10, and Number 21. He always knew what number his Egos were when he saw them. Number 21 was the truly curious one, since it was always easiest to find the most recent Separated Beings. That wasn't the only thing troubling him, though.

The previous night, he had seen Sophie staring at him and Madelyn at the front of the tent, and had urged the clueless mortal to follow her, somehow certain that she wanted to show him something. He had not expected to turn a corner just in time to see a large squid-like creature speared through the center by a dark-haired woman who was vaguely familiar, though he could not tell where he had seen her before. Madelyn had gasped and whispered, "Lowercase?!" He hadn't really been sure what she had meant about that, but he hadn't had time to inquire before the girl had announced herself and her intentions. The Immortal Hunter…. He had only met her a couple times before yesterday, but she had always been strangely familiar with him, calling him Spinach as if it made perfect sense. Why she was singling him out now and why Nemo had led him to her were both deeply discomfiting mysteries.

There was a kind of snuffling sound and for a horrified second, he thought he might have unconsciously started a dog snuffle, but he glanced up at the mortal and finally noticed that her eyes were somewhat watery. Feeling a little bad for her, and grateful for what she had done for him, he placed a paw on her arm, causing her to pause and lift her other arm to rub at her face. He couldn't communicate verbally with her, but thus far, she'd been good at picking up at his body language clues, at least. This time, he also had an advantage. He might not be able to communicate with any of his Egos, either, for some inexplicable reason, but they were him, on some level.

Number three stepped forward, the characteristic cocky Baelishious smirk slightly faltering. "I do believe he wants to know what's wrong with you, girlie." He knelt down and his head tilted up at an odd angle to try and meet her eyes in a nosey way.

It took her a bit to pause her sniffles and get ahold of herself again, but she managed to compose herself and set Jorick down on the ground, crouching in front of him. She opened her mouth, but seemed to have trouble putting the words together. She swallowed a couple times and tried again, seeming to have better luck if she didn't look him directly in the eyes, though her voice was still quiet. "Lowercase is- Lowercase is my friend." He mostly wanted to ask what that meant and what it had to do with anything, but something told him if he asked her now it would break her concentration. "She said she was tired. Five years ago. When I met her." She took in a shaky breath, then properly launched into a brief explanation. "When I met her, Lowercase was stealing from my garden of inkplants in that form. When she saw me, she threatened me with a knife and told me th- that she was an Immortal who killed people. Not just a "lowercase immortal hunter" but THE "Immortal Hunter." So I invited her in for tea." One of the Egos who had been moving a little closer tripped over his own feet and landed on his face, though he sprang up again appearing to pretend as if nothing had happened. She did not seem to notice.

"It- made her laugh, and I thought it was a nice laugh, so we-" she gestured vaguely, "ended up talking, and talked all night long, and she said she was glad she didn't have to kill me. She said every time she took that form she ended up having to do terrible things, and it made her tired. So I told her-" Madelyn sighed. "So I told her that she could keep that form only in front of me, and everywhere she thought something bad would happen she should take on a form that didn't make her do terrible things. And she- laughed and said it wouldn't make a difference but, that that was what she would do."

The point of this story was only sort of slightly making sense to Jorick, but Madelyn didn't go on. She simply rubbed her face again and picked him up, this time placing him in a rather undignified manner atop of her head. "We need to find the rest of your Baelishes, right? I've thought of something. Send up a flare. Uhm- if you can't use magic now, then have the assembled Egos do it."

It oddly surprised him that she had come up with an idea that might have actually been good. He had avoided a beacon thus far partially because he hadn't wanted to attract any attention and partially because he couldn't cast magic in this form, but the Egos certainly had enough magic to send up a flare, and there wasn't going to be much point hiding any longer now that he had found so many of them. He nodded at her, but the Egos were already on it, putting their hands together and sending up a large signal against the sky that looked rather irritatingly like a dog. That was definitely the sign of a dog. Jorick growled at his Egos, but they just looked back at him cockily, the little shits. A grin touched the dog's mouth, though no one would have recognized it as such. That was what made them him, he supposed.

It didn't take long for the final four to arrive, all bearing the same look, and then they were ready. He only hoped it had been on time, and the Immortal Hunter had kept her word about giving him the night before really starting her hunt. He looked around at his assembled Separated Beings, and they looked back at him with identical expressions of confidence. They were ready for the fight ahead. It was time he stopped relying on this little slip of a mortal. Hopping off of her head as nimbly as a cat, Jorick turned back to look at Madelyn and his Egos. It is time. Let's find a good spot to end this.

As he lightly padded off, he heard Madelyn inquire about his destination. Number Three replied with confidence, "I think he's sniffed out a chocolate milk bone." The little dog rattled out another sigh, knowing his Egos had known perfectly well what he'd actually been trying to convey. Those bastards. They were as bad as Nemo, if that was possible.

Anaia had spent the night on top of the roof of the living space that had originally been assigned to her, still in the form of a girl with dark hair. She was clean now, though, and no longer had a weapon with her. The fiery little bird was sitting on her shoulder now, appearing to observe the sunrise with her. "Sophie. Did you do it?" She spoke into the air, though anyone looking on would've been convinced that she was alone.

The Imperatrix appeared standing next to her on the roof. "Shouldn't you have asked me that several hours ago when the White Ravens originally escaped?"

"Hrm…" She thought about it glibly. "Well, you were all so busy. Even with you wearing that ridiculous "On-Break" sign, I didn't feel right to interrupt you. But the sun is up and I can't wait anymore, so verbal confirmation was important before I re-complete myself and my guardian half has to abandon her charge."

Nemo laughed aloud. "That's a super vague comment. It's like you think someone else is listening and don't want them to know what we're talking about."

Anaia turned her head and winked at her. "Oh, you know who might be. I think we upset him, yesterday, actually. He's always thought he knew everything, and when he found out about what you did to the D'Darks he did not look happy. How the mighty fall when the scales fall from their eyes, and all that."

Nemo snorted. "Stop trying to be all philosophical and mysterious. It doesn't suit you."

The grey-eyed girl gasped mockingly. "Are you saying I'm not deep and mysterious!? How dare you! I take my duties as an angsty edgelord villain very seriously, sis."

"Who said we were villains?" The question had been flippantly said with a little laugh, but both girls went uncharacteristically solemn and quiet. Nemo attempted to provide something that might have sounded like consolation if they hadn't been the people they were. "We're not, even if that's what she decided. In fact, she's the closest thing to a villain I've ever seen. She gave us the responsibility because she knew we were prepared to do what needed to be done and didn't want the blood on her own hands, but that doesn't mean she controls us, Anya." She paused and took a breath, clarifying, "I'm not doing any of this for her or to save the world or anything else like that." Anaia could tell she was trying to say it almost defiantly, but her voice struggled slightly through the sentence.

For a while, neither said anything, but Anaia finally mustered up the will to spit back, "Then what are you doing it for?"

Nemo sucked in a breath, and her next words were practically whispered. "Maybe I wanted to see what it felt like to be a savior instead of a mistake." Her breath was shaky but she added in a louder tone of voice. "And this doesn't bother you? All the killing? I thought you said you'd reformed."

That earned her a snort immediately. "I most certainly did not! There's no reason for me to reform! I'm quite happy to be who I am and I happen to be the Immortal Hunter, thank you very much."

"Is that what you're going to tell your little mortal pet?" She asked, knowingly.

Anaia stood up abruptly, clearly upset, but maintained some level of outward composure, somehow. Gritting her teeth, she took a deep breath and looked evenly at Nemo. "I don't regret the things I kill. Mortals, monsters, animals, second-gens, they all have souls. They go somewhere after they die. Killing them here is just sending them on into that next place, wherever it is. It's not evil to send someone down a new journey, life does it all the time. But at the end you and I, and all the other first-gens and the rest of the gods, we will just be gone altogether. Our very existence ground into nothingness as if it never was and does not matter. There is no greater punishment than that, and I've always been prepared to take it. I'm not like you, Soph. I know exactly what I'm doing and why I'm doing it. As for my lovely Moody, you already know we won't speak again." Her gaze went from hurt to sly. "Shouldn't you be worrying more about your little mortal friend? Ricey, was it? Weird nickname. I'm sure I could find her if I tried. You wouldn't want my hand to just… slip a little. Now would you?"

"I thought you knew better than to try to threaten me, little abomination." Nemo grinned wickedly before fading away, leaving Anaia to slump back down onto the roof alone, burying her face in her arms with a heavy sigh for a long moment. She'd risen to the bait, when she should have kept her cool. There were more than enough things to be getting emotional over today, as it was. She sent a silent prayer up to gods she knew were not there, hoping somehow that a little faith would protect and strengthen her dear mortal friend, even as she got to her feet once again. Time for her to go to work.

Nav had slept. She had slept fitfully, and she wasn't sure when exactly she'd slipped from consciousness, but she had slept and surprisingly felt a little better for it. The odd, painful feeling in her chest like something was lodged there hadn't fully gone away, but she had gotten used to it somewhat, and no longer felt it as strongly. She looked over at Elle Joyner, who was sitting beside her, fast asleep, and immediately felt a little guilt well up in her heart. Guilt, but also gratitude. Even without knowing the full situation, her first mate had always been steadfast. If possible, she would have preferred the entire crew be far away and somewhere safe, but if she had to have a companion, she could not think of a better one than Elle. Smiling quietly, she pulled her jacket from around her shoulders and placed it over Elle's, wishing her a few more moments of rest before whatever trials this next day was bound to bring. Not many else in the tent seemed to be resting. Most of the dragons were huddled up together in one corner of the tent, keeping a wary eye on everyone else there. To her surprise, the leader of that little group seemed to be Rose.

The Butter Dragon was sitting several steps away from Nav and Elle, animatedly speaking to a clearly excited Kim. Tari was curled up next to them, her head in Kim's lap. The two were a comfort to each other in troubling times, and in light of the strangeness of the previous day, Nav could see why Tari would need a little comfort. Lifting her head to an opening at the top of the tent, Nav saw that the sky was still dark, but not completely. Dawn was about to break. She moved quietly closer to Kim and Tari.

Diana acknowledged Nav's presence, stopping whatever she was saying and offering her a gentle smile. Nav wasn't about to trust that as far as she could throw it. "Welcome, Genavieve. Please, sit. We did not wish to disturb the two of you as you slept, but I would appreciate you joining us. I have heard much of how you rescued my descendant from smugglers."

"She's been teaching me magic!" Kim interjected, excitedly. "Dragon magic!"

"Has she?" Nav asked, coldly, eyes still trained on Diana. Her hysterical mindset yesterday had done no one any favors, and had kept her from keeping a clear head. Now rested, she had more than a few questions, no few of which involved the leader of the dragons and her behavior. Diana's smile did not waver, and she met Nav's eyes without shame. "And what kind of magic is that?"

"It's dragon magic, of course." Kim laughed gaily. "Look, like this." She opened her mouth wide and her teeth suddenly grew long and sharp. Her eyes changed as well, pupils becoming narrow slits and her irises turning a disturbing gold color. She changed them back quickly with a satisfied smile. "Diana says if I keep practicing, I'll be able to turn into a full dragon whenever I want! Ooh! Look! This, too!" She held her hands palm up and Nav saw light start to swirl in them. At the same time, she felt her jumpiness and suspicion leech from her. It was a disconcerting feeling, even more disconcerting when Kim said toothily, "It's your feelings! I can manifest them physically!" The sailor's sense of alarm skyrocketed.

"Oh I see." She said, not even feigning pleasure. "And what else has th'butter dragon been so kind to teach ye?"

The little Dracari didn't seem to notice the tense atmosphere, and was quick to answer Nav's question. "She taught me to link minds with other dragons, and gave me some of her memories so I'd know the history of the dragons. There isn't much more to dragon magic, though Diana says if I learn how to show my dragon scales all the time, I can be impervious to fire and some magic, and someday when I grow up all the way, I'll find a specific emotion that only I feed on and I will get my own special skin and name to reflect that, like how she's the butter dragon, and rose is the rose dragon. It's so cool!"

"It's probably harmless, Nav." A sleepy voice croaked. Nav looked up to see Elle had approached them, rubbing her eyes. She dropped Nav's jacket back into her lap, but gave her a weak smile. "I was awake for the first half of it. Even Tari didn't feel so bad about it after a while." The two women exchanged glances that prompted Elle to add, "It is her birthright. And once she got old enough we were going to have to let her connect with her dragon blood at some point anyways. Might as well take advantage of having the dragons close while we can."

Tari grunted and rolled over, propping herself up on one hand. "Where'd we moor?" She croaked, blearily, tail uncurling in a slow stretch. Her eyes weren't fully opened, and it got Elle to crack a genuine smile.

"We're on land, Tari. We have been since yesterday." The first mate explained, sitting down, herself. "Don't you remember? The tent, the dragons?"

The little lizard-girl shook her head and stretched properly, bones cracking. The floor hadn't been the most comfortable place she'd had to sleep. At least the ship had the hammocks. "No, I cleaned the barnacles yesterday." She muttered, before properly looking around. Kim was stifling a giggle with both of her hands. She gave Diana an uncomprehending squint and asked, "Are we having catfish soup today, Cookie Freddie? Is it my birthday? You know I love catfish soup…" Her head drooped back down, threatening to fall back asleep.

Far from being insulted, Diana looked thoroughly amused, as she gently corrected the girl. "I am not your cook, young lady." Kim burst into full-out laughter that startled Tari properly awake. Against her better judgment, Nav felt herself relax a little bit. The whole situation was still weird and frightening, but the sound of Kim's laughter at Tari's constant morning struggle made her feel a bit more like things were back to normal. Tari was turning red and trying to scold Kim, but didn't get out more than stammers, as Kim talked over her, teasing her mercilessly. Even with Diana sitting with them as if she was a rightful part of their group, the hum of life was comforting and familiar.

It all went wrong in a flash. There was a pop, and a girl appeared in their midst. Nav turned and surveyed the intruder up and down, eyes barely believing what she saw. Long, black hair. Grey, whiteless eyes. That expression. The girl wasn't looking at her, thank the gods, but she remembered that expression from a very long time ago. Those whiteless eyes scanned the huddle of dragons on the other side of the tent with the absolute certainty only she had in one single fact: They were going to die today. Anaia grinned. Nav shot upwards, face losing all color, and bellowed at them, "RUN!!!" But it was already too late. Before any of the dragons could react, Anaia had lifted her hand to reveal a pistol and begun to fire at them.

People sometimes said that guns were little metal contraptions that shot fire and death, but this description was highly exaggerated, in Nav's opinion. A fast Immortal at the top of their game could usually avoid the flashy little machines that mortals carried around, or even construct barriers to block the bullets. The Immortal Hunter's pistol was a different matter entirely. There was no loud bang or fancy waving around. Just one silent shot after another, and with each shot blossomed forth a thin column of flame that instantly vaporized the form of whatever it touched. It required the sort of spellwork that wished to erase the universe from existence. Angry magic. Evil magic. The sailor had thought so when she had first seen it, and she thought so now, as she dully heard Kim screaming in shock, Tari and the Butter Dragon holding her back from the fray.

Nav grabbed Tari and yelled over the surprised roars of the dragons, "Hold on'to Kim. Come on, Elle, we can't stay here!" She jerked towards the exit, but a burst from that horrid gun sliced its way in front of them, putting a hole in the wall. Nav felt her head turn almost against her will, and to her horror, the Immortal Hunter was looking at her. She was grinning, but there was something in her eyes that Nav didn't recognize, or perhaps didn't understand. It wasn't sadness, but something more bitter. The black-haired girl shook her head almost imperceptibly. If she was trying to silently communicate something, though it wasn't working. Nav hadn't the smallest clue what she was implying, and more importantly she wasn't sticking around with her crew to see what horrible things the little murderess was planning.

Thankfully, she wasn't the only one with this opinion. The Imperatrices had been in and out here and there, but two were still in the tent at the moment, and Nav heard the one with horns call out, "Brie!" catching the attention of the one with milky pale skin. This "Brie" immediately began ushering the remaining dragons out with Diana's help, and the Immortal Hunter didn't seem inclined to stop her.

In fact, the Immortal Hunter had stopped firing and had fixed her gaze on the horned Imperatrix. Her gaze, however, seemed… was it even possible for her to feel fond of someone? Nav hurried to join Brie in the efforts to evacuate everyone in this temporary reprieve, but she found her attention drawn to the two women standing there in the ruined tent calmly. Their voices somehow seemed to ring in the space for the sailor, the sound of the angry and even slightly confused and panicking dragons faded into the background, despite being much louder. She didn't hear as Tari asked her worriedly what was going on.

The Immortal Hunter brushed her hair back. "Pahndora! So nice to see you again, little niece." Niece? It was impossible for a first-generation to have a niece, at least in the traditional sense of the word. "Everything ready?" What was supposed to be ready? Genavieve stared daggers into the Imperatrix. Wasn't she supposed to be one of the current rulers or something? She'd never heard of a mortal ruler scheming with Immortals, especially first-generations.

Pahndora gave a little smile and bowed. "It was all prepared as my lord Jorick asked. Now it is your turn to complete your duty, Nemesis." The Immortal Hunter stuck a tongue out at her, clearly not liking being called the Nemesis, even if Nav couldn't imagine a better nickname for her. Worry creased Nav's brow. Jorick was one of the trouble-makers. If this Pahndora was referring to him as her "lord," she couldn't be on the right side. Nav was about to break away from the group exiting through one of the giant holes in the wall and ask the horned mortal just what was going on, but the commotion among the dragons finally managed to break through her strange funk. One very literally slammed into her, causing her to lose sight of Pahndora as she took a moment to maintain her balance. She wasn't given an opportunity to find the woman again. The dragon that had run into her was starting a fight with the Immortal Hunter, and Tari lost any semblance of patience, bodily dragging Nav out into the open and away from the spectacle.

Anaia's new challenger was the rose dragon, who was literally breathing fire. The look on the Immortal's face was hardly worried, lifting an arm to protect herself from the first punch Rose threw, though it landed with a solid thud, followed by the crack of one of the Immortal's bones snapping. She didn't seem to mind, though, simply dancing away with her injured arm snapping back into place and dodging the stream of fire that Rose shot at her, allowing it to catch the fabric of the tent alight with flames. The two of them continued this bizarre flurry of movement, Rose attacking angrily and Anaia taking every hard blow that landed as if a mosquito had bitten her. After a while, though, the dark-haired girl seemed to grow tired of this. She ducked another punch and shook her head with an impatient sigh. "Wrong opponent, dragon."

As Rose opened her mouth wide to shoot another burst of flame, Anaia simply lifted her gun and propped the muzzle on the bottom row of Rose's teeth, looking boredly as if she was going to fire just because this was taking too long. Miraculously, however, a single small rock smacked into the side of the small pistol, knocking it out of Rose's mouth before either of them could fire their intended shots. The whole thing happened in less than a second and temporarily startled both fighters into stillness. Anaia's eyes lit up with excitement even before she caught sight of the thrower, who was less-literally breathing fire.

"Eo!" She exclaimed happily, before Rose got in a solid slap across the face that left a large red mark across her cheek. That was the first hit that actually seemed to make her angry, but the dragon was suddenly grabbed from behind by E.L.'s white-haired companion, who had appeared within the burning tent with just as little ceremony. Seeing Rose dragged off kicking and swearing appeased Anaia a little, and she focused back in on E.L. with pleasure. He had one of his usual cheerful smiles on his face, but it was warped a little, an unusually spiteful twist added to it. That didn't seem to bother her. "I'm so happy to see you!" She said. The Shape Thief swung her pistol up and it suddenly morphed into what looked like a matchlock rifle, which she rested on her shoulder the way she had yesterday with the sword, not at all looking like she was ready to fight.

The blue-haired man didn't oblige her with words. E.L. Anthill made the slightest twitch of his fingers, and Anaia could feel several barriers effortlessly erect themselves around him, with a few backup ones to prevent the amount of magic he was using from affecting Ano Taku or the dragon he was still wrestling out of the tent. Each piece of magic was a work of art, layers of complex spells woven together expertly in a matter of moments. She wasn't even capable of telling what all of them did, but she could feel some meant to dissolve created forms, prevent her specific brand of magic, strengthen his own physical power and speed, and protect him from the fire all around them. He hadn't even started an attack yet. This was a show of strength. "Have I ever told you you should have gone into basket weaving?" The female Immortal asked him cheekily.

There was still no response from him. He just pointed one finger at her, and Anaia dove for the floor just in time to miss a series of explosions that certainly would have ripped through her current body as if it were wet toilet paper, though they avoided bringing the burning tent down around them. She placed one hand on the floor, and six metal spikes popped out of the ground around her, forming a light, protective hexagon that was totally ineffective against his next attack. A snake made purely of concentrated magic and rippling with what looked like electricity barreled for her, forcing her to jump up towards the top of the tent and create several body doubles to distract it. As intimidating as it was, the snake was more of a distraction than anything else as E.L. pulled the ground up into the air around him, lumps of dirt forming into animated dragons that the girl knew weren't going to be normal golems when he finished them. Normal golems were given a single, simple task to achieve and otherwise needed to be specifically directed by their masters. Eo was taking time to build these, which from him meant they were going to be physically reinforced and fully autonomous, with some level of higher thinking, at least until their purpose was fulfilled. Their purpose probably being to destroy her. She eyed them darkly, but couldn't seem to do anything while also dodging the snake he'd sent after her.

Coming to a temporary full stop, she turned to face the snake and pointed her rifle straight at it. One of her regular bursts wasn't going to cut it with this thing, if it was reinforced just for her benefit, so she went with a ray of her own raw magic that split into several thin lines as it went, forming a multi-pronged structure that would separate the lines of magic that made up the snake, rather than trying to destroy them. Considering the snake was the distraction, this was a bad start, but she hadn't come to fight him anyways. "C'mon, Eo-eo, why you so anguhry?" She wheedled obnoxiously.

He had finished those damn dragons. Anaia slammed the side of her rifle into the head of the first dirt dragon to knock it away from her and hopped over the swinging tail of another one. Things with forms were her specialty, though. After what felt like ages of her dodging, firing, hitting, and stabbing, she brought her elbow hard down between the wings of the last dragon, splitting the heart that kept it together. Eo's voice caused her to turn again, expecting another attack, but none came. "You crossed a line." He wasn't faking a smile anymore.

That brought the Immortal Hunter to a hard stop. Genuine surprise blossomed all over her features. "Eh?" She could hear him over the crackle of the flames, her brain just wasn't sure what to do with what she had heard.

The two of them faced each other, silent in the middle of the tattered and burning tent that probably wouldn't have still been standing if it hadn't originally been reinforced with magic. Though some distance apart, they locked eyes, and Anaia tilted her head to one side, a faintly confused expression on her face. She could see his body unable to fully cope with the extent of his emotions. He brought his finger up and shook it at her vigorously, as if he couldn't think of any other way to really express what he wanted to convey to her. "You crossed a line." He repeated, lamely, tongue just as incapable of forming his thoughts as his body was of conveying his feelings. He took a deep breath, steadying himself, and Anaia thought she could see a little of his usually talkative self return. She let him come back to himself, however many breaths it took. "I have done a lot of things to lead each Age into the next, and so have the rest of you. But this is not a game." He stressed. "You don't get to play with other people's lives and mock their deaths to satisfy yourself. There are things we have to do, but there are also lines you don't disrespect." His breathing was heavy as if with exertion, though the burst of magic that would have killed a mortal mage to do hadn't even caused him to break a sweat.

The surprise still hadn't left the girl's face. Her jaw had actually slightly dropped open as he spoke, and the confusion lasted a far sight longer than she usually paused for anything at all. What finally resulted was an incredulous burst of real laughter, not at all like those nasty little giggles she gave out so liberally. "L-Ai-Nz?" The word was having a hard time coming out of her mouth, or perhaps she was tasting it, trying to figure out if she liked the dish it served. He didn't try to speak, though he clearly wanted to. The silence gave her a chance to sort out her next words, which came in a ferocious rush when they did. "The murderers shall be the saviors, and the blameless shall massacre the last of the good." E.L. flinched, recognizing the line of a longer prophecy he had given before the end of the Mid-Age. "Did you know the God of Love came first? He didn't fight the spell, so he came first. He came voluntarily, but he didn't expect it to hurt so much to be sacrificed, I don't think. He screamed so loudly." The high-pitched cheeriness had returned, but that somehow made what she was actually saying crueler. "Oooh, you should have seen Marissa's face. She turned so pale I thought I could see right through her skin. But you weren't there, were you?" She giggled, but there was a hard edge to her voice when she spoke. "And if not tempered with reason, the mercy of a weeping god will let live the End of all Peace. Was it fun watching the God of Form trying to decide if he should destroy me, without telling him what was going to happen if he didn't? Especially since you were the one who convinced the God of Whimsy to make me in the first place. Oh! Oh! Or you know, this one is my personal favorite, so eloquent of you, Eo. But the cry of the earth will awaken the forgotten purpose of the Lost. Really good idea to keep that bit of information all to yourself, Bringer of Fates."

By this time, she had managed to regain all of the almost-creepy verve she was known for, but the blue-haired Immortal across from her looked positively sick, an expression totally foreign to his face. He set his jaw defiantly. "Are you saying you don't think I deserve to have lines?" His voice was low and hoarse.

"Oh no, non no!" Her rejection in the fakest accent imaginable was almost more insulting than if she'd said yes. "I'm saying you only have them because other people have crossed them for you." Her voice hardened again, and grew low and serious. "This is a game, Eo. You made it one."

She chuckled one last time and flung her rifle into the air. It didn't distract him. He knew her tricks. He swung one hand up to strengthen his barriers as the Immortal Hunter sprinted for him, leaping lightly past the holes in the ground where the bodies of the dragon golems had come from. She didn't slow down as she hit the barriers built specially for her, stripping away any protective spells she might have had on her person and stripping her flesh away with it. Her body was turning to dust even as she advanced, getting ever closer to him. By the time she reached him, there was nothing left of her body but the bones, the grinning teeth oddly fitting the expression she'd been wearing when she'd had flesh anyways. And then she was right in front of him, placing the tips of her first two fingers against his head in a bony finger gun. "Chk-chk pakaoowwww." She said somehow with no lips at all. Nothing else happened. The only bit of magic that had gotten through all his spells had been just enough to keep the skeleton animated. "Wrong opponent, Eo." She said, the same way she'd said it to Rose.

E.L. instantly understood that he'd been wrong to focus on her physical form as a girl. Slamming his palm into the skeleton's forehead, he sent a shockwave of his own essence through the bond the skeleton had to its animator to injure the original creator. The skeleton crumbled, and a shriek of surprised pain told him where she really was. The rifle she had thrown had turned into a fiery bird the size of a small dog. If he had bothered to extinguish the fire of the tent, he would have seen it right away, but with the background already on fire, an extra bit of flame hadn't made as huge of a difference and he had missed it. The bird was pulling itself back upright when he reached it. He felt pretty ready to stomp it into the ground, but the calmness with which it looked at him convinced him to pause and wonder just what had been so important she'd had to distract him in such a risky way.

She shuffled slightly to the side and he saw that she'd been perched on top of a fresh body. Ano Taku was lying there, a gash through his throat so deep that it had almost decapitated him. His normally blank eyes were wide in frozen shock, and it was clear from the glassy quality of them that his soul was long gone. That was why she had been talking to him. She was waiting for Ano to finish dealing with Rose and return. Her target hadn't been the dragons or E.L. at all. The Bringer of Fates fell to his knees, while Anaia casually built herself a new form, the bird once again small and nestling atop her head. He watched as she went for the front of the burning tent, unable to retaliate at all. She met his gaze just once more with a sad little smile he would have thought was genuine if she hadn't just killed his steadfast friend. "I choose for my legacy to be death." Those were the last words she spoke to him before raising her hand to brush aside one of the main flaps of the tent, the flames failing to so much as tan her skin.

After exiting the tent, she stood there in front of it for a bit and let out a breath, letting her smile curl back into a devious grin. She tilted her head up and the bird there took off, flapping in front of her eyes. "So? Where are they?" No audible reply came, but the bird swooped forward heading for the stage that had been set up earlier for more festive events. An absurdly fitting setting.

Jorick and his crew of Egos stood proudly center-stage, feeling somehow certain that his adversary was coming to him. The sounds of screams and shouts and the crackling of flames echoed from a tent he couldn't see, tempting him to leave his post, but one little thing was stopping him from moving. Not long after he'd taken up his position, a certain nobody had taken up residence above a lamppost, perching there lightly and sipping from a little porcelain teacup with a paper umbrella sticking out of it. Nemo's presence almost surely meant he had chosen the right place for his last stand. What's going on over there? He asked her, unhappily.

She took another fancy little sip from her teacup, taking her time before answering. "Anya's killing the dragons." This brought a gasp of surprise from Madelyn, who was hiding behind the curtain on the stage. Jorick himself flinched a little at the announcement, but it was impossible to express the full extent of his surprise and displeasure in this form.

He paced back and forth restlessly. The Immortal Hunter? She told me she would wait for me to be ready. Who would ever trust the word of the Immortal Hunter, though? He reasoned to himself, angry that he'd fallen for it. Is she coming, Nemo?

"Yes, yes, she's coming. She knows you're ready, and she's stopped killing them for now. She'll keep going if you fail, though." Nemo didn't sound particularly upset about it, propping her legs up casually on nothing. "She only stopped because E.L. Anthill interrupted her and the rest of them got away. Now you're in her way."

The dog gave her the best baleful stare a chocolate Yorkshire could. How do you know all this, Nemo?

"Oh, you told me. She told me. You know, the plan." She waved her cup of tea around vaguely, but no tea sloshed out of it. She was barely even looking at him, as if he didn't matter, making it clear that there was no point for him to ask what exactly this plan that he had told her about was supposed to be.

Madelyn peeked her head out from behind the curtain, peering around for whoever was having this confusing, one-sided conversation. "What's going on?" She asked, curiosity getting the better of her.

Jorick turned around sharply. Tell her to keep hiding.

He should have known that Nemo didn't like taking orders. "He said he needs you to come out and play epic battle music."

Madelyn didn't seem too sure about this interpretation. She did have good sense, after all. "He did?" She asked with a frown, still looking for the speaker.

"Don't be silly, Soph. He was clearly telling her to climb up the closest lamppost so she could get a better view." Came the unmistakable, horrifyingly cheerful voice of Anaia. There she was, sitting on top of a pole brazier, that little bird nesting in her hair again. Although she was having a conversation with the Imperatrix, all her attention was focused on the little dog.

"Lowercase!" Madelyn exclaimed, her voice relieved, contrary to even her own expectations. "Are you okay?" She didn't notice, or couldn't see the looks of disgust everyone else was giving her. "Tell me what's happening. Please." She received the nicest smile the Immortal Hunter could probably muster, but no reply. From her, anyways.

She wants to know if sh- if you're okay? Jorick asked skeptically.

"Shut up, Spinach. I'll have you know, I was the favorite child of all of my four fathers." Anaia made a joking grimace at him, as if that would somehow mean something to him.

The dog sniffed at her. The… Immortal Hunter has forefathers? I thought she was a first-generation. Nemo outright laughed, intentionally spilling an endless stream of tea onto the ground as she nearly rolled off of the post with laughter.

The other girl had her arms folded across her chest in a disgruntled fashion. "FOUR. FATHERS. One two three four fathers. I am an original, thank you very much!" She grumbled.

"What did he say?" Madelyn asked, desperately confused by the conversation.

If he could have possibly interjected to stop whatever nonsense was coming next, Jorick would have. As it was, his protestations that, It was nothing went completely unheard by the poor mortal.

"He said he was wondering if having forefathers made her tastier." Nemo said at the same time Anaia blurted, "He thought I'd killed off all the forefathers who didn't like me." Neither seemed particularly bothered about the conflicting interpretation, or at least not enough to correct one another, but it did strike up a conversation.

Nemo cocked one eyebrow at the other girl, setting her teacup aside so it floated in the air next to her. This was clearly a very serious topic of conversation. "That isn't that ridiculous, Anya. It works for both four fathers," she held up four fingers, "and forefathers, and it could have been true. Even with your kill count."

For the first time since arriving, Anaia's eyes darted away from Jorick, displeasure written all over her features, her arms still crossed. "I've never killed family, and you don't get to say anything about my kill count when you were totally useless when I was being the Immortal Hunted."

Giving the most mockingly exaggerated shrug possible, Nemo shook her head. "But I wasn't the one being useless when the gods started going on a rampage, or when the monsters started getting out of hand in the Age of Mortals. I've definitely made up the numbers with the monsters alone."

Strangely, the argument actually seemed to be getting heated. Madelyn had even left the safety of the curtain to stare curiously with Jorick and the Egos. Needless to say, the two girls were completely ruining the gravitas of the moment, as Anaia argued, "You're always so proud of having been one of the best monster hunters, but it's not like there were that many of them."

Madelyn sat down next to Jorick and whispered, "What are they doing?"

One of the Egos put his index finger and thumb on his chin in a pointed 'thinking' expression. His voice was grave, but tinged with the usual mocking quality that made one think twice about taking anything he said very seriously. "They appear to be very concerned about who's killed more people."

"But why?" Madelyn asked again. The little chocolate dog looked over at her, surprised by this woman once again. She wasn't looking at him at all, which gave him plenty avenue to inspect her a bit. She didn't seem frightened, nor had she when they had first made it to the stage and she'd been ushered into a hiding place. She certainly hadn't seemed like a fighter, so it was odd to him how calm she'd remained about everything that had happened. She'd seen someone murdered right in front of her and hadn't so much as flinched, beyond being concerned about the murderer in question. There was clearly something a little different in her priorities than most people. It struck him for the first time that this woman herself may be dangerous.

He abruptly interrupted the disturbing argument the two Immortal women were having. Immortal Hunter. Who or what is this woman?

"Hmm?" Anaia looked back over at him. "Who? Well, I believe I introduced her already. She's my Moodles. Madelyn. She's an inkubus."

An incubus? But I thought those were almost all me- His eyes wandered over to her again. She was looking at him in slight confusion, having caught on that he was talking about her, but unsure of why. The story about the inkplants clicked into place. Not an incubus. An inkubus. He knew the history. The gods had made many different types of mortals in the fight against the gods, including some that could feed off of life energy of some sort. They all turned out to be pretty useless in the fight against the other gods, because each one required a certain action to take life force, but after the fall of the gods, a number became wildly successful, particularly the succubae and incubi because they tapped into lust. The inkubi had risen at the beginning of the Age of Mortals. Using the inkplants that grew liberally as weeds in the western half of Iwaku, they could slowly suck the life out of whoever looked upon or read anything they painted or wrote. They had been very successful until Jane the Insane watched her uncle waste away in front of a famous painting by Ink-arnate, one of the most notorious inkubi in history, and massacred as many of them as she could find. I thought they'd gone extinct. He muttered.

"Do you remember now?" Anaia asked, impatiently. "They were your pet project, after all."

What's that mean? He asked, uncomfortably. Madelyn also seemed pretty concerned by what little she could hear, too, but neither of them were given much time to dwell on it. He had just started suspiciously saying, Why were you trying to raid an inkubus's- when Anaia leapt from the top of the brazier, landing with a solid thud in front of the both of them.

"My gosh, you ask so many questions, Spinach! How very unlike you! It really is better if you hurry up and start merging with your Egos again." Her attention was squared on him again, and he realized the little bird atop her head had morphed into a long rifle, which she was leaning on like a cane. "You're really boring when you're being all serious."

"I don't know. I'm going to miss him being a dog." Nemo called from up on her pole.

Wait. The dog glared up at the Imperatrix. If I'd merged with one of my Egos I could have gotten out of being a dog? She nodded at him with a smirk. And you didn't tell me? The girl with the pony tail just raised her arms in a casual shrug and took up her teacup again.

"Spinach says he loves you, Soph!" Anaia supplied with one of her little giggles, despite full well knowing that Nemo could hear the string of swear words he was using in place of her name. Grumbling, Jorick padded over to the closest Ego and held out a paw in a "shake" motion, urging the Ego to take it. It took a bit for the sucker to comply, but when he did, Jorick could feel his body changing, morphing and stretching smoothly. He closed his eyes against the strange feeling, and when he opened them again, he was a man identical to the rest of his Egos. He flexed his fingers and felt a smirk tug at his lips. Turning his attention to the Immortal Hunter, he saw her shooing the inkubus away with a little smile, as if trying to reassure her that everything was fine. Their relationship was a strange one indeed, for Madelyn seemed to accept the shove back behind the curtains almost without any argument at all. It wasn't just that the mortal was allowing herself to be pushed around because she was weak; she seemed to really have no problems with whatever was going to happen, whether people died or not. It made her almost scarier than the one going around killing people for sport. "And what are you staring at, Spinach?" The Immortal asked, brushing her hands off after having safely gotten Madelyn backstage.

"I want to know what's going on." He said, reveling in the sound of his voice again, low and rumbling. Truly, being unable to communicate with people who were not trolls was torture.

Anaia simply pointed her rifle at his head and fired. "Didn't I tell you you were just so boring when you keep asking questions and being so serious? If you want answers, merge."

He frowned at her, having just barely ducked in time. "Merge? With my Egos? Why do you want me to do that?"

She groaned and fired at him again, still looking like she was barely trying. "More questions. Questions, questions, questions." She put her hands on her hips, looking for all the world like a disgruntled child. She shook her weapon at him as one might wag a finger. "You can either do it now and spare yourself the embarrassment of getting beat up, or keep asking questions until I blow your tongue off!" This was, apparently, not a very convincing argument, and got Jorick to do nothing more than raise his eyebrows. She had another card to play, though. "Or, fine. I could start hunting down all the Immortals now. We don't have to do it this way, though it would've been so much easier." The black-haired girl sighed and made as if to walk away, but Jorick took a step and twisted, performing a perfect short-length transportation spell and ending up right in front of her. A sword he had not been previously holding was now pointed at her chest.

She grinned, and Jorick tried to shake the annoying sense that he had just been forced to do exactly when she wanted. There was nothing for it but to fight, now, though. He drove his sword forward, but she side-stepped and gave her rifle a little flip in her hands, turning it into what appeared to be a regular little wooden sword. "Swords it is, then!" She yelled gleefully, and the two of them went for a proper sword fight. It was a somewhat frustrating game. Rising to the rank of Princeps Imperator had partially been a product of his exceptional ability to fight hordes of monsters with a combination of magical ingenuity and physical prowess. The Immortal Hunter didn't seem to care. With that silly wooden sword of hers, she casually knocked aside all of his swings, no matter how fast he tried to move or what spells he used to strengthen his swing or transport himself faster than any mortal could manage to respond to. Spells to trap her into stillness simply seemed to let her slide right through like an eel, attempts to surprise her ended up with him staring her right in the face as she giggled and prodded him in the chest with her wooden weapon.

He popped up behind her, swinging with his might, and there she was again, spinning around just in time and raising her sword for an easy block. "Which one did you merge with? Twelve? He was never very interesting. You split with him when you were going through a rough emotional patch, Spinach me friend. I told you it was a bad idea running from your feelings if you couldn't handle them later, but- whoops!" She ducked as he yanked his sword away from hers and took a swing from a different direction, taking advantage of her distraction. "How about Number Three, huh?!" She shouted, apparently determined to keep up this conversation. "You got rid of him because you said he made fights boring what with being so fast and nimble and all! Or Fourteen! Good instincts, that one!" She dodged a thrust and bopped him lightly atop the head. "Really, Spinach, no need to be stubborn. You're at less than five percent of yourself, and I'm at about half. This isn't really a fair fight. More importantly, it isn't very interesting. Don't you think so?"

As much as he was loathe to agree with anything she had to say, the Imperator had to admit this fight wasn't much fun with her toying with him, though her comments about his strength level and her in-depth knowledge of his Egos were concerning him greatly. Yet another thing to ask the Immortal once he'd defeated her. Stepping back, he grabbed the hands of Four and Thirteen, intentionally choosing numbers other than the ones she had suggested, just to spite her. As he did so, he felt his exhaustion and frustration melting away. A corner of his mouth tugged upwards again, as he felt himself absurdly starting to enjoy the situation. He could tell he was stronger, too, delivering quicker and heavier blows. It still wasn't enough, though. She was still only defending and teasingly poking and prodding, no real sense of danger in her actions. "Still too slowww." She needled. Jorick could tell she was trying to goad him into merging with more of his doubles, and was tempted not to just to spite her, but something in the back of his mind was telling him it would be more interesting that way. He hadn't had a fight this challenging in some time, and he wasn't going to give up the chance to see her at full power just because of his pride. It struck him then that the two of them were similar in that way. More obsessed with their love of the interesting than with what other people had to say about them.

He shook the thought from his head. No sense comparing himself to the Immortal Hunter. Everyone knew there was something wrong with her, and he wasn't about to subject himself to that, of all things. What had he been thinking? Since she still wasn't attacking him, it took no more than a few steps and a hand held out for him to merge with more of his Egos. The girl watching him clapped her hands together excitedly, balancing her wooden sword atop her head for a moment to do it. "Yes, yes, yes." She said, "The elegance of Eight, the precision of Two, oh do please go on." The naked hunger in her eyes could really only be described as disturbing beyond all measure, but the power he was gaining with each merge made it too enjoyable to stop simply because she was being disturbing. It wasn't really all that different from how she was normally, anyways. He didn't pause to question that thought, though. Halfway through merging, Anaia flew at him, brandishing her wooden sword seriously.

This time, however, things went differently. As her blade landed on his, he twisted his sword around hers and ripped it from her grip, leaving her defenseless for a moment. She threw back her head and laughed, black hair falling away from her face as she narrowly dodged a swing. "Now this is a challenge." She said, gleefully. "Good!" A quick somersault had the weapon back in her grasp again, but he could tell he was catching up with her movements, she even sounded a little short of breath. His spells to hinder her progress, on the other hand, were still proving mostly useless. As he ran after her, he grabbed another Ego, merging with it on the go, a feat that had also become significantly easier with his newfound physical abilities. So it went, the two of them dancing around each other in a flurry of movement. The more of his Separated he merged with, the more she had to adapt, and at seventeen Egos in, she began disappearing from view in a way much more reminiscent of Nemo's disappearing trick than any transportation spell he had ever seen. Complex magic did not appear to be her strong suit, but nor did it seem to affect her much.

He was now pretty certain he was well able to match her physically, if not exceed her, it was just that troublesome habit of hers of disappearing that was now becoming a problem. He couldn't sense it at all. It wasn't like she was really disappearing, it was more like for a moment she simply ceased to exist altogether, and there was no way of finding someone who did not exist. Jorick took a slice at her, but his sword passed through her like smoke as her form vanished again. There had to be a way to catch her when she did that. Scowling in concentration, he attempted to pour magic into the sword, though what sort he was hard-pressed to say. As intentional as he was most of the time when utilizing his magic to fight, this felt like the sort of thing he wanted to rely on his instincts for, if he was to be fast enough to catch her before she showed up again. With both hands, Jorick slashed through the air with all his might.

Instead of catching his opponent, Jorick tore straight through the fabric of space, exposing the mid-space, through which the Chariot of Space traveled. He stared in stunned surprise, not only because he hadn't intended to do any such thing, but also because the gaping gash in space was roiling with some sort of black, milky substance, not quite liquid and not quite gas. Flashes of angry red and purple lightning streaked through the black mass, illuminating its ever-changing shape. There was something horribly, horribly wrong.

"Whoops!" Anaia appeared right next to the gash, a massive rubber eraser in her hand instead of her sword, and scrubbed the space where the break was, "erasing" it and turning the landscape back to normal. "Can't have you doing that, Spinach! Don't do that again, okay?" She said, disapprovingly, wagging her finger at him. "The mid-space has gotten all corrupted and things. It's not even safe for people to use the Chariot right now." She disappeared and reappeared again floating above his head with her legs crossed. "How about this?" The next minute, she was hanging upside down in front of his face. "You let me merge with my other half, and I'll stop hippity hoppitying through space and all of those things, and we can has a proper fight."

"Other half?" Jorick demanded, grimacing up at her.

"Well, her of course." The upside-down Immortal grinned and pointed. Jorick turned to look, and jumped backwards in alarm, holding his sword out in front of him. He should have known. The Witch of the Water, as she was known, was standing in giant watery spider form right beside him. He had no idea when she'd gotten there or how. In any case, the apparition had been said to never leave her place at Anaia's Cliffs, and even he only knew who it was from description. She looked… well, not nearly as intimidating as he had imagined. As scary as spiders could be, the air of immense boredom floating about her made it a bit difficult to take her very seriously, much less be scared of her. He also got the impression that she was glaring at him in a faintly offended manner, but spiders couldn't exactly glare, so he wasn't sure why he felt that way, either.

"So how 'bout it, Spinach ole boy? You let me do the merging, stop slashing holes in space since you don't know what you're doing, and you get to kill me! Win-win all round!" The glee with which she was saying such ominous things made him want to say no just on principle, but something in the back of his mind nagged at him to let it be. He, Kitti, and Astaroth had all planned for her to merge with the Witch of the Water, anyways. Since he had found the prophecy hidden in a bag on the edge of the forest, exactly as his dream had told him, he had thought they would need the old Immortals prepared for whatever was coming and willing to be on their side. Instead, it seemed to him that these old Immortals were moving on their own, doing goodness only knew what. This had been a part of the Imperatores' original plan, he tried to convince himself, but her going about killing people had not been part of the plan, and it was unlikely she was asking him to let her merge because the Imperatores had planned it that way.

"If I say no?" He asked warily.

"Then I guess I'll just have to ignore you!" Anaia said brightly, immediately launching herself over his head and landing on the spider's back. Jorick tried to stop her, but she had caught him by surprise and he didn't have any time to do more than close his fist on empty air while trying to grab at her clothes. When she touched it, the watery spider began to shrink, still looking at him with that impossibly offended expression. Finally, the Immortal Hunter was all that was left, standing there with her eyes closed, whole at last. At first nothing happened, but she gave a little shiver, and he took a step back, because that little shiver had sent power rippling through the air. Her power.

She opened her eyes and looked at him, face uncharacteristically expressionless. "I'm itchy. Gods, I haven't felt so much like exploding in so long." She muttered to herself. Her hands began to shake as she pulled them up to look at them and her whiteless eyes began flashing various colors, finally settling on a vivid purple that looked horribly wrong in her eye sockets. A flat, empty screen of purple. "It's so irritating." The words curled from her throat in a low growl, serious and solemn, almost masculine, and somehow it became apparent that she was looking straight at Jorick. "So irritating. It needs to- I need to go-" She stretched out a shaking hand towards him, as if to wrap around his throat. It didn't look as though she was moving very fast, but Jorick jumped back and was just in time to escape a hand that had definitely gotten too close too quickly. Scared wasn't the right word, but something about her purple eyes frayed his nerves.

She didn't need to prompt him this time. Jorick merged hastily with three of his remaining Egos and brandished his sword. "Don't run." She said, a strange giggle following, though her mouth made no movement to form it. Her voice wasn't loud, but it echoed, almost bubbled, the sound swelling awkwardly around the empty plaza. "Make the itch go away." The Imperator stood his ground, but drew his sword back as the Immortal Hunter sprang forward, expression feral and nails growing long and sharp. She grabbed his blade full on with her left hand, squeezing it and pulling it away from her as her right zipped forward, claws ready to dig into his neck. He lifted his own left hand to shield himself and cast a spell at the same time, but then a woman's horrified voice stopped them both.

"What are you doing?!" Anaia and Jorick both stopped and swiveled around to stare at Marissa, freezing with their eyes on her in almost identical expressions of shock. Anaia gasped and stumbled away from her opponent, looking as though someone had poured cold water on top of her head. Her eyes glowed for a second, still that horrid purple color, but then she closed them, falling hard on her butt, hands still shaking. She pressed her injured hand to her forehead, incognizant of the blood that stained it.

Jorick, however, had not moved, and the pose he was in looked rather comical, but he was too overwhelmed to spare any thought for that. Memories he did not recognize were flooding into his head. Who was this woman?

"I'll take care of them." Her voice echoed in his head, bringing a blinding headache with it. "You just abandon pieces of yourself here and there… I can't leave your dumb Egos all alone. They disrupt balance if you let them run around like that." No, it had nothing to do with the balance. It was because she was kind. Rough around the edges and sometimes a little too quick to violence, but always kind. She was the only one who thought of them as real people. Beloved friend. If only she knew….

Jorick came back to himself and realized he was staring. Marissa Kellenghan, Keeper of the Scales. Yes, he knew that she was the Dismantler of Wars, he'd met her during his coronation, but this memory was far, far older. Significantly older than his own memories stretched. It didn't make sense. He'd made all twenty Egos… when? When had he made them? Why did it feel like he'd lost parts of himself a much longer time ago? Why was she here? "Who-"

"Ahem." Anaia caught his attention. Her eyes looked normal now, and were brown in color. Perfectly, utterly normal, unlike the flat, empty grey he had seen earlier. She smiled, and it wasn't at all unpleasant or creepy, though it seemed somewhat more directed at Marissa than at him. Her nails had returned to their normal size, and her hands were no longer shaking, but a simple pistol was hanging from the tips of her fingers. "Shall we continue? Or I could go hunt down the rest of those little dragons. Your choice."

That instantly caught his attention. Figuring out these weird memories could come later, the girl in front of him was the bigger problem. He blinked at her, unsettled for a moment. Something was wrong with the way she was looking at him. The Immortal Hunter with all of herself trying to kill someone didn't just look at her 'prey' pleasantly. He knew the look she'd given her victims in the past, her eyes picking them apart, deciding how they would die today as if she could see it happening in minute detail, a feat not even the Bringer of Fates could manage. More things he shouldn't have been alive to know. History of the High Rulers dated her splitting with the Bloodlust or whatever-it-really-was long before the first High-Ruler had risen to power, long before his time. She didn't let him dwell on it. A splitting headache had him wincing and when he opened his eyes again she was in front of him, sending the hilt of her pistol smashing into his face. He yelped and just barely managed to avoid a serious blow, but it still felt like she had broken his nose. He frowned at her. She hadn't followed up with a second blow; she was just standing there looking at him.

"Come on." She said, almost impatiently. "I don't have all day."

"Why call me out? If you wanted to go kill the Immortals and the rest of the dragons, you'd do it, not challenge me to a fight." He said, eyes narrowing as he asked a question he knew he should have asked earlier.

She let out a long, disgusted sound. "If you want to know, why don't you ask that last Ego there you've been ignoring?" She darted forward, and he found himself able to track her movements. Even when she vanished from in front of him, he could sense where her 'being' was. His sword moved before his mind could and slammed into a disembodied gun, which fired at him several times. He was ready for her, though, and avoided the shots entirely.

Their continued fight didn't please their spectator, though. "I asked what you two were doing!" Marissa roared, and her old-fashioned metal scales burst into view in front of her. Her fury had broken her out of her surprise, but Nemo, as if she had been waiting for the opportunity, popped from her spot on the pole and plucked the scales from the air right there in front of Marissa. The glow faded from Marissa's skin and seemed to creep up Nemo's skin instead, from where she was holding the scales. She didn't take well to it. The elusive Immortal seemed to have difficulty moving, her whole body beginning to shake as the faintly blue glow began to crawl up her arm. Her face was set in a solid grimace, but she pulled one foot up and took a step back. "N-Nemo. Nemo let go." The anger hadn't quite dissipated from Marissa's form, but there was something else there, too: fear. It wasn't fear for herself, clearly, but fear for the other Immortal. She took a step closer.

"M-m-m-m-m-ma-a-ke m-m-e." Nemo's voice rattled with her body's shaking, but she twisted around and disappeared in a snap, taking the scales with her. Unlike her usual disappearances, however, the remnants of a very shoddy transportation spell floated in the air. If she'd gone out of form, she clearly wouldn't have been able to hold on to the scales.

"Dammit, Nemo." Rissa muttered. Reaching her rough hand out, she closed it around the remnants of the spell, using it to form her own spell and chasing after the Imperatrix with a pop.

The black-haired girl was doing that annoying "standing still and staring at him" thing again. She swung her pistol casually around her finger by the trigger guard, as if it was the most natural movement in the world, and Jorick couldn't shake the feeling that something was very wrong with the entire situation. He glanced over at the Egos left, realizing that there was only one. It was the 21st one, the same one he'd been having trouble finding earlier. Unlike the other Egos who had been watching the fight with some interest, some even joking and gossiping amongst themselves, this one stared straight at Jorick, unsmiling. It was only now he realized that it had been doing that the entire time. Talk about creepy. Perhaps that had been why he'd avoided merging with it until the end.

"You're going to need it to beat me, you know." Her voice caused him to look back over at her, still standing there with a slightly amused gaze. "Go on, Jorick the Separating, merge with the last of your creations." For a second, her dull brown eyes flashed silver it seemed, but that may have been a trick of the light.

He scoffed at her, cocking an eyebrow in skeptical amusement. "I don't need anything to beat you."

She threw back her head and laughed, but it was pleased, rather than mocking. "There he is! There's that old cocky confidence! Even if you think you can, and I know you can't, maybe you could do it as a favor to me? You owe me." The girl grinned toothily at him, rather as one might imagine a shark would upon spotting injured prey.

This did not make Jorick feel better, but he felt a sense of intrigue at her comment. He raised both his eyebrows then, smirking at her clear bluff. "Oh really? And why would I owe someone like you?"

"Oof, how harsh." Her high-pitched voice didn't sound offended at all, and the classic, creepy giggle that followed didn't seem to betray any sort of hurt. "Let's just say it's just one more thing you'll know once you merge with Twenty-One." The two of them locked eyes in something that was less a battle of wills and more a silent, but wheedling exchange. After a minute of her wiggling her eyebrows at him, and him smirking defiantly back, she clapped her hands together and pressed them against one cheek, exclaiming, "But Jorick! You're my destiny!"

His face instantly morphed into an expression of abject disgust, causing the girl to collapse in a fit of laughter. Wiping a tear of mirth from her eye, though, she continued in far more serious tones. "How about this? You merge with Twenty-One, and I will tell you where your true love sleeps. You merge, and you will know what all of it means, Jorick. All of this." She spread her arm out in a magnanimous gesture, but it didn't escape his notice that her eyes momentarily flashed to where the sun was rising in the sky. Hurry now, not much time left. He suddenly heard her voice resounding in his head. This wasn't a memory like it had been with Marissa, though. As he looked her in the eyes, he could tell she was speaking directly to him, inside his head. We're on a tight schedule. You never know when Nav is going to find him again. None of that made any sense to him at all, but for some reason, he believed her.

She lifted her pistol, bracing her other hand under the grip, as if she was properly planning to aim for this shot, and Jorick ducked to the side, grabbing the hand of his last Ego and doing his very last merge. There was no lull in the fight from then, nor any more words that needed to be said. She blocked several of his sword strikes with her pistol, but a gun was not terribly convenient for blocking sharp objects. They fought at a close range, and more of her attacks were with kicks and punches, but every shot she made counted. One bullet whizzed past his ear, stunning him for a bit, another caused the sword to fly from his hand and he had to run after it as another bullet chased his butt down. It was by no means a one-sided battle, though. He got in a stab in her left shoulder that she pulled away from him just barely in time to avoid a deeper slash. She didn't even stop to touch it. He got two stabs into her left leg, but she pushed him back for a bit, and finally she pressed the barrel of her pistol to his forehead. The two of them paused for a bit, and for a second, she hesitated. Her finger tightened slightly on the trigger, but it wasn't enough to cause it to fire.

Before she could, Jorick moved in a flash and plunged his sword all the way through her throat. She seemed to try to speak, but the only thing that came out was a gurgling breath. She smiled at him, and amazingly, despite the strange situation, the gentle curve of her lips was genuine. To his surprise, her voice resounded in his head again. Do you remember?

~~

Jorick was sitting on a rock, enjoying the silence of the night. Of course, this being a very important flashback, it was a very long time ago, and obviously it was a long time before any mortal had come into being. For some reason, he hadn't been able to sleep, so he was up on the mountain, drinking in the sight of the stars up above him. He took in a deep breath and closed his eyes briefly, but when he opened them again there she was, sitting next to him as if it was the most natural thing in the world.

"I have a favor to ask you." The Four-fathered said. She was currently wearing the form of the Black and White, as she had done often since she had killed him. Most people thought she did it to mock his death; Jorick, when he bothered to think about it, was of the opinion that she just didn't care what form she took on and the Black and White's was convenient since everyone knew he was dead and she had killed him. He really tried his best to think about his fellow creation as little as possible, so he was unwilling to dig into any deeper motivation she might have than that. She was none of his concern, and most definitely not his fault.

He thought about not responding and just pretending she hadn't come up to him to disturb his peaceful night, but he sighed and gave in, asking grumpily, "What do you want?"

"I've just been getting a bad feeling lately." She said. This in and of itself was a bit of a surprise. He hadn't been aware that she was capable of feeling anything, especially not feeling bad about anything, even if she should. He did not dignify it with a response, which was just as well, because the point of her request had been slightly different. "So, if it ever seems like the world's in big trouble, I want you to kill me."

That got him to stop and sit up properly. He actually turned to look at her, frowning suspiciously. "What? Why?" Not that he objected to trying it. He had opposed her creation strongly in the first place. It just seemed like an odd thing for her to say, when she had killed so many to ensure her own survival.

She wasn't looking at him, staring up at the sky exactly as he had been. Her voice was flippant, but her expression far from it, and for a bit he thought she really did look like the Black and White, with his steadfast earnestness. "Well, because I don't think the Gods really thought about it when they made me, you know? God of Fire, God of Water, God of Form, God of Caprice? If they hadn't tried to pair me up with that pathetic hamster, I would've thought they made me just so they could spit at the Gods of Love and Balance. So, I don't know. I get the feeling if forced to make a choice between blowing up the world for fun and going through the shitty duty of keeping it safe, I may randomly decide to blow it up."

He couldn't really argue with this probably accurate self-assessment, so opted for a gruff, different question. "Why me?"

He regretted it the second he said it, because her voice bubbled with an implied 'I'm glad you asked!' "Well! To start with, I've never really felt like killing you, which I feel like would make it easier on everybody in general. And I think you're strong. Maybe even stronger than me. So you could probably do it. Actually defeat me and kill me off for good!" There was a lot there that sounded like a compliment and really didn't feel like one, and boy it did not stop. "Besides, you act like a grumpy fellow, but you're actually quite dutiful, aren't you?" He really wished she would stop talking and let him get a word in, but even if she did, he wasn't all that sure he knew how to respond to any of that nonsense. "Since you're also the creation of the God of Form, I thought maybe I could treat you as if you were my brother. Y'know, that when the time comes you wouldn't shy away from doing what needed to be done – that I could rely on you. What do you say?!"

He didn't even have to think about his answer on that one. "No." He said, straight away, face straight. He wasn't sure what was worse, the fact that she was trying to converse with him, the idea that she considered him her brother, or her belief that she could rely on him for anything.

She did not seem much perturbed by his refusal. "You say that, but you'll do it, anyways." She said. Still staring at her distastefully, Jorick noted that there was that look in her eyes again, the one she always got when she was about to kill someone, but this time it was not directed at any one person. As she stared up at the stars, it seemed as if she was watching her own death play out in front of her eyes, like she was already making her peace with something no one else could see, not even the Goddess of Death herself.

The suggested inevitability of her statement irritated him, especially when she was ruining his night to supposedly ask something of him. "You shouldn't talk as if you really know who I am, Anaia, because you don't." He snapped, looking away. It was perhaps a childish move for him. He'd always believed himself above things like that, except in jest. From the corner of his eye, he saw her head whip towards him in surprise, and he thought he saw her face genuinely fall for a moment. A twinge of guilt tugged at his heartstrings, but he brushed it off as a passing thing.

She looked back up at the stars. Her words then were soft. "Maybe not. But even though we're talking about silly hypothetical things, I think between the two of us, it's you we'll have to trust to do 'the right thing.' Whatever that is." Jorick did not deign to respond to that and the two of them continued watching the stars in silence for a long while after.


~~

Do you remember what you told me back then? You said I didn't know who you were. She continued.

Ugh, you're still going? He shot back at her, silently, though his expression was amused rather than irritated. Of course he remembered. He had regained all of his considerable memories and abilities when he had merged with his 21st Ego.

He thought she probably would have giggled if she could have. Shut up, I'm dying. I get to have a dramatic death monologue, and someone stabbed me in the throat so I can't do it aloud. She bantered back. Anyways, as I was trying to say, it bothered me that you said that. I thought about it for a long time, and I realized, you're right. I don't really know you. But the one thing I do know is that you and I are two of the only three children of the god who decided to give grief a physical form. Not anger or surprise or joy, nor even love, but grief. I don't know why, but when I realized this, I thought that I would not feel ashamed if you were the one. She patted his cheek with one, blood-stained hand, leaving him wondering how someone could be so condescending even when dying. Make it look good, will you? My one and only brother...

He locked eyes with her and again got the uncomfortable feeling that she had seen this precise chain of events exactly as it had really happened, all those years ago, long before the Madness of the Gods or the plans they had hatched together. He let out a sigh, but complied with her dying wish, drawing the sword from her body in a dramatic spray of blood and stabbing it into the wooden planks of the stage, where her blood began to collect in a little puddle around the tip of his sword. She collapsed to the ground, and moments later her wobbly little fake soul drifted from her body, too weak to create a new form. He reached out and grabbed it, as only he could, and ripped it apart, releasing the shards of the gods that had made her and allowing them to fade away as any other Immortal's soul would have. The Ninth of the Dark Gods was once again unleashed on Iwaku. But that was not the only result of her death. As she died for good, Jorick sensed something strange. One elaborate spell seemed to crack almost audibly, another whirred into motion. He narrowed his eyes slightly, knowing those two spells were part of the many things she had not told him. Plans she was taking with her to the grave, more literally than he'd like to admit.

Holmer stomped up to the barrier, carrying a small leather satchel filled with papers Cherilyn had helped him compile. Prophecies, evidence, information on the creations of the God of Form, it was all there. He just needed to get it all to Kitti. Cherilyn was busy seeking the others still outside the gates to update them as well. They would all be pretty tough to find, but this information changed everything. Almost all the various tasks had to be readjusted to account for the plans of the old Immortals. It had all taken forever.

As soon as he crossed the threshold, he sent Kitti a call, fumbling with his satchel slightly to get to his cell phone. The barrier was absolute. Not even signal would have gotten through while he was outside the grounds of the carnival. "Hello?" He called loudly, as soon as it picked up.

Kitti's voice was as light and pleasant as ever, but somehow it still managed to convey how very strongly she was upset with him. "Holmer and Cherilyn. We had expected the two of you would have finished speaking with the Witch of the Water within a few hours instead of a few days. I hope nothing has gone wrong."

Holmer did his best not to swallow loudly, and quickly made efforts to collect himself. The Imperatrix being upset with him was nothing compared to the news he had to give her. He took a breath to steel his nerves and barreled forth in a burst of breath. "Nothing exactly went wrong with our errand, but you have a big problem. You need to find the Twelve Gates of Norlathel. That's what they call some… elite group of the ancient Immortals. I don't know what's so special about them, but that's not what's important. They're going to kill each other off to release gods, and then get rid of all the dragons they can get their hands on, thank the gods we didn't make the dragons attend, and three of them are your Imperatores or Imperatrices!" He said, urgently. "This pandemic is not the real problem, not the prophecy either, all of the prophecies are going to happen no matter what you try to do. Both things are just symptoms." He flapped his arms for emphasis as if she could see him as well as hear him. "It's got something to do with either the gods or the land dying, and if it goes wrong, who knows what could happen? Where are you right now?"

He was looking about the carnival as he talked, and was worried to find it completely dead in the area he was in. Even though it was early in the day, if everything had gone to plan, everyone would be busily setting up their stalls for the day. The eerie silence in the front made the billowing smoke in the distance and the screams faintly coming to his ears on the wind painfully obvious. He was dying to know what had happened while he and Cherilyn had been gone, and desperately hoping things were not nearly as bad as they seemed.

Kitti's response was not very reassuring. He heard her instruct Peregrine to go ahead of them to see what had happened before she even stopped to reply to him. "We're back at the stable tent of the carnival, heading towards the front. Go to the big stage in the center of the carnival. It's a good meeting place for us to catch you up and you to explain about these Twelve Gates more." Her voice was urgent, and he thought he heard her stress the words 'Twelve Gates' unconsciously as if she had heard the term before and their mention worried her.

"Alright, I'm almost-" Holmer rounded the corner to the center stage and dropped his phone in the dust, because he arrived just in time to see the strangest sight occurring on stage. One of Jorick the Separating's Egos was standing above the corpse of a girl with long black hair, making a motion as if he was tearing something apart, though Holmer saw nothing in his hands. As he did so, four little lights fled into the sky and hung there before vanishing. "What just happened?" His mouth said, before his brain could process it. The Ego turned to look at him, wiping blood from a long blade.

"You're late, Holmer." The mustachioed man said with a slightly wicked grin, and Holmer knew instantly that this was not an Ego. So far as anyone knew, Egos did possess some sort of mental capacity and free will, but none had really used this supposed free will for anything other than awful pranks, and Holmer had most certainly never had one address him directly. This was Jorick. How he had freed himself of his doggy trappings, Holmer did not know. What he did know was that the girl at Jorick's feet was the Immortal Hunter, and he had killed her with that ripping thing he had done. His research had told him that directly ripping a soul apart was one of the three ways to kill a god, and the four shards must have meant she was the Four-fathered. There weren't many Immortals with that many shards. The young Immortal took several steps back, cursing himself for not having brought a weapon instead of all his research. At least Jorick didn't seem to be in a blindly homicidal mood. He was sheathing his sword, clearly feeling like his fighting was over for now.

Something zipped above their heads, and both Jorick and Holmer glanced up at it in time to catch a glimpse of Peregrine shooting towards the fire in the distance, but the distraction was temporary for Holmer. "You killed the Immortal Hunter." He said, incredulously. "But I thought the two of you were working together."

The man raised his eyebrows in an almost mocking expression, taking in Holmer's words without seeming very worried about them. "To do what, exactly?" He asked, genuinely seeming curious, or half-curious half-smug, anyways.

That threw Holmer for a bit of a loop. Wouldn't Jorick know better than he what they were planning to do? "To- uh… I don't know! You know, to control the fate of the world, choose the next Age, things like that!"

Jorick just laughed at him. "Thousands of years of planning, a massive spell to make the entire continent forget that I was an Immortal, and you think this is about the next Age? You think like a mortal, kid. Such a narrow field of vision."

Just moments ago, Holmer had been so sure that the man in front of him was not an Ego, but he wasn't acting or talking like Jorick, either. In his experience with the Impera- no, no with the Immortal, the man had been deadly serious. Consistently straightforward and no-nonsense. Not… like this. "Who are you?" He asked, anxiously, clutching his bag like his life depended on it.

"I thought you knew." Jorick said, coolly.

"Well…" Holmer responded uncertainly. "To be honest, so did I. But I thought I'd make sure."

Jorick hopped down from the stage to stand level with Holmer, but he looked distracted, as if waiting for something else to happen. He wasn't quite focusing on the conversation they were having. "I'm not the Shape Thief if that's what you're wondering." He cast the dead girl on stage a brief glance. "She's dead. But I'm guessing you knew that, since you know so much about us now." He gestured at the satchel, still looking a mixture of curious, amused, and smug. Holmer instinctively drew the satchel slightly back, shielding it from Jorick's knowing gaze with his body. The older Immortal just grinned and said, "Why don't you tell us exactly what you've learned, Creation of the God of Plenty? What tipped you off during your errand?"

Holmer squinted at Jorick, face completely scrunched up. "Did you know we were going to find out or something? The Witch of the Water said something about Immortals among the rulers. That wasn't part of your plan or anything… was it?" That hadn't been his initial thought, but the other man was just being so calm, it was making him question everything.

Jorick rolled his eyes in exasperation. "No, Holmer. It wasn't 'part of the plan.' Whether or not a 250-year-old child of the least active Immortal clan in history gathered some information from dusty old documents wasn't really high on anyone's list of priorities. Ever."

He most certainly was not as young as 250! But he didn't get a chance to vocalize his outrage, because a soft voice chilled his bones. "That would depend on what sort of information he gathered, wouldn't it?" Kitti's face was flushed slightly, and a couple of her golden locks were in disarray, but her voice was steady and there was no sign of her being out of breath. Astaroth was close behind her, looking for all the world as if he had been standing there since the beginning of time, instead of being forced to run there as quickly as possible. Kitti was still smiling, but she was fixing Jorick with a steely gaze.

When he didn't respond to her intimidating yet polite stare with more than a, "It's about time you got here, Kitti," she pressed her lips tightly together in an expression that made Holmer back up a couple steps. Mortals were pretty scary, but none more so than the former Empress of Galer.

"If you don't think Mr. Holmer's information is valuable, do you think you could explain a few things to me, Jorick? Starting with what you're doing next to a dead body." She asked pointedly.

Jorick was still looking somewhat distracted, eyes briefly flashing to the skies before he answered with a grin. "I should think that would be obvious. That-" he pointed at the body, "is the Immortal Hunter. She threatened to attack and kill all Immortals and the dragons unless I stopped her, so I fought with and defeated her."

Holmer couldn't figure out where to look for answers. The dragons? They weren't here, were they? As long as they were outside the grounds and Anaia Tsukasa was inside, she wouldn't be able to get to them. The way Kitti and Jorick were looking at each other told him they were both deadly serious, and more likely to ignore him than anything else.

"Any other questions, Princeps Imperatrix?" The elder Immortal asked, mockingly.

"Oh, plenty." She answered back without skipping a beat, venomous sweetness in her voice. "There is so much we need to discuss, should we go inside and talk over a cup of tea?"

He seemed reluctant to move. "I don't think there's any need for that. This is as much privacy as we need. Or…" His voice trailed off and he looked to the side, a triumphant look growing on his face. Kitti, Astaroth, and Holmer all followed his gaze to see both Peregrine and Brie running towards them. Brie's normally fair skin was almost sickly pale, and Peregrine's expression was tight and just barely controlled.

"The dragons." Peregrine called out before they had even really managed to fully arrive. "The dragons are all dead." The two women stopped in front of the group. Peregrine had her palms against her knees, trying to catch her breath. Running was much more difficult than flying.

"What are you talking about?" Kitti asked, sharply, voice losing its normal gentleness for a moment.

Brie was less out of breath, but she allowed Peregrine to do the explaining, as she seemed to be reaching for the words. Taking a huge gulp of breath, Peregrine told them, "By the time I got there, half of them were already dead, but no one was fighting. No one could find who it was, but the dragons just kept dropping. The killer didn't touch anyone but the dragons, but I don't think even one escaped."

"Definitely not." Jorick said, certainly, interjecting in the conversation. "She knew all of them. There's no way she'd miss any."

All heads turned to him. Kitti was the first one to speak. "What do you mean she?" She asked, quietly. "Weren't you supposed to stop the Immortal Hunter from killing the Immortals and the dragons? If that is the Immortal Hunter," she gestured at the body, "then who killed the dragons?"

Jorick shook his head. "Dragons, you see, technically class as a special type of Immortal. The Immortal Hunter to hunt for Immortals." A lopsided smile made an appearance, spelling trouble. "But most people understand them as monsters, instead. And that's what she's better at."

Kitti repeated her question, with extra emphasis. "Who is she?"

"The first of my fellow creations: Sophie Outis, Nemo, the Nonexistent, the Second Creation without Breath." He said, with a flourish.

Kitti startled, as if struck. "Nemo?" So it hadn't just been Jorick who she had had to be suspicious of. Even worse, why was Jorick talking about creations and the Nonexistent? None of the mortals that could be called creations were alive anymore. "Your fellow creation what-?"

Jorick grinned. He knew how much Kitti hated Immortals. "I am Jorick the Separating, First Creation of the God of Form, and a meddler in mortal affairs. The mortals once knew me as the Formless."

Grumpy glared down at the map in his hands. They had followed the little red line faithfully, the golden spot letting them know where they were going. After flying all night, they had reached a large X-mark that said, "STOP HERE." It had most definitely not been there before, but it had popped up when they'd gotten close. The bandit still wasn't sure he trusted the strange voice who had given it to him, but it looked as if there wasn't anywhere else to rest before their destination and they all needed rest. The village was small, and even if it hadn't been empty because of the carnival, it did not seem like it would have been bustling normally. The only modern structures among the old thatched roofs were billboards and sign posts advertising "Anaia's Cliffs."

As the others searched the village for supplies, Grumpy leaned down and read one of the plaques. "The Town of Shosing was established in the year 4019, by refugees of the last war of Onone. Initially formed close to what was originally known as the Grand Cliffs of Shosing to discourage visitors, the town now prides itself on being the last destination to stay for adventurers seeking thrills at the Eastern edge of Iwaku, now known as the home of the dreaded Immortal Hunter. Not a place for the faint of heart, Anaia's Cliffs have long been known to be inhospitable to all life, though no one knows why. Those who venture beyond the town line rarely return. Adventurers beware."

He glanced back down at the map and the destination marked down there. "Inhospitable to all life?" He scoffed. They were a hardy band, and he knew they could survive anything, even the Immortal Hunter, if she was there. At least it appeared the strange woman had been telling the truth. Even with the bright trail the needle had left, it seemed very unlikely that anyone would follow them to a place like that. Shaking his head, he waited for his bandits to gather again and report their findings.

"Boss! I found a person!" Sneezy called, running up to him before anyone else had a chance to get there. This was alarming news. All the people of Iwaku should have been at that dumb carnival.

Grumpy drew his sword, a savage grin on his face. They couldn't afford to leave any survivors, could they? "Where? Have you taken care of them already?"

"Well, not exactly. This way." The other dwarf led him over to a nearby cottage and pushed open the door. Sitting in the middle of the main room, with a book in his lap, was a petite individual in a wheelchair. At first glance, it would be hard to say what gender this particular individual was, but Grumpy had met him before, and knew from his voice. The man had not introduced himself when they had first met. Nor did he attempt to do so now. In fact, he did not do much more than look up from his book at the two of them. Sneezy jerked back with an, "URK!" One of the cripple's eyes was a perfectly normal brown. The other was a flat screen of silver. Not grey, but truly silver. In fact, his eyeball appeared to have been replaced with a mirror. Grumpy could see his reflection there in that mirror of an eye, but his reflection began to move, reaching towards him. The reflection's outstretched hand started looking oddly red to him.

Sneezy stretched his neck forward to look more closely at his own reflection and Grumpy slapped a hand over his eyes. "Don't look at it, you idjit. C'mon, let's go."

"Wait, but-!" His underbandit tried to protest.

"Ignore him." He said, gruffly. "You didn't see anything, and the rest of them are probably waiting for us."

Sure enough, the other five were already gathered in the plaza, looking a little impatient, but they didn't ask where they'd gone. The look on Grumpy's face convinced them not to. "The people left all their food in their pantries, it seems." Dopey sarted. "They either left in a hurry or were planning to come back, because everything has been left as if people were still living there."

"We're staying here for the day." Grumpy told them all. "Rest, pack up provisions, feed the birds, and we'll leave in the morning."

Sleepy spoke cautiously. "What if there are people following? Can we afford to stay a whole day?"

Grumpy couldn't help himself, he took a peek back towards the building he and Sneezy had just left. Sneezy noticed it, but wisely kept his mouth shut. "I'm pretty sure this place is safe for now. And then we're heading for the Cliffs, gents, first thing tomorrow morning. Whatever's waiting for us there, I'd rather be prepared than hasty."

Mika Starglimmer blinked and found herself looking up at a dark ceiling. Her head felt like it was about to split open and a pair of glowing yellow eyes were staring down at her. She yelped and jumped up, almost crashing into the person who'd been trying to shake her awake. "SHHHHHHHHH." The intruder said, clapping his hand over her mouth. "It's me. It's Shiz." He hissed.

His Highness Prince Na'hc Oushiz of the Kingdom of Amore had sneaked his way into Iwaku a week ago, and when he'd heard there was a "writing camp carnival" going on, he was not about to miss the chance to join in just because foreigners hadn't been invited. He wasn't on official business, anyways. He had always wanted to see Iwaku, one of the few magical countries on the world, supposedly. Amore had its fair share of magic, but they were small in comparison, and even as a little boy, he'd wanted to visit the land they traded so vigorously with, having heard such magnificent stories about it. He certainly had been having a good time this week.

In the meantime, most of his mother's men were probably searching for him in a craze at home. Mika had left a note letting them know that he had gone with the intention of staying away for a month, but she knew it wouldn't be enough to stop the queen from worrying. Her wayward son had never really shown any interest in settling down. Heck, he was 23 already, and still gallivanting about looking for adventure. He had heard his mother make plans to have him be betrothed to some well-to-do lady in a few months, and he'd insisted he was going to take a vacation before it happened, telling no one but Mika, his personal guard. Mika was of the opinion that he was taking the "ball-and-chain" bit a bit seriously, particularly since she'd heard wonderful things about the lady in question, but there was no stopping him. She had attempted to talk him out of it, tried to get him caught twice, but nothing worked. They had safely and successfully snuck onto a smuggling ship (which she was most definitely cracking down on when they got back), and made it all the way over to Iwaku, which was coincidentally calling home all of its citizens for the coronation of their new rulers.

While she wasn't happy about the journey, she was admittedly curious. The Iwakuans had always been very private, and had in fact refused any sort of contact with the outside world until some fancy "Imperatrix" had opened its borders only a few hundred years ago. People hadn't even known they had existed before then. Even after they had begun to allow trade and their people had started making contact with other countries, they had only rarely allowed others within their borders, especially not during special times like their coronations. After the coronation, they had done a great deal of exploring, and while it had been interesting, she hadn't seen any reason for such secrecy. It was just another country, like any other. She would have even dared to say that Amore was more technologically advanced. But then they had slipped into the barrier, and yesterday had changed everything.

She and Shiz had been right there when the two women had suddenly started fighting, for no reason Mika could tell. She had dragged his highness away, but the chaos hadn't stopped there, and they had run this way and that before finally sneaking into someone's cabin to hide out. The prince hadn't been pleased about it, but even if she let him get away with everything, she wasn't letting him endanger his own safety. At some point, she had found herself falling asleep, but it hadn't felt natural. She knew there had been something wrong.

Waking up now, with that massive headache, she knew it had to have been some sort of magical spell. She tried to speak, but he still had his hand over her mouth, and she had to pry it off first. "Your high-" He hastily covered her mouth again. They were hiding in a rather cramped storage space under the cabin, as the tent cabins themselves had no good hiding places. This meant it was not very comfortable, but it was very easy to find his throat and jam her hand against his Adam's apple. He choked and let her go to tap out quietly. "Your highness." She whispered back. "How long have you been awake? Do you have any idea what happened after we fell asleep?"

He scratched at her hand, still choking a bit, and she realized he couldn't answer with her hand on his throat. He took a big gulp of breath. "I don't know how long I've been awake." He coughed. "It's been a while. People have been moving around putting other people in the cabins. I think they're all done now, but it doesn't look like anyone else has woken up."

She frowned thoughtfully. "Whatever they did must not have worked on us right because we're not native Iwakuans." She clambered up and grappled for the door, using the dim light from the cracks in the storage room to find her way out. Although she winced slightly at the clunk of the handle as she pushed the door open, a peek around told her the prince's assessment had been correct. There was no one else in sight. She tentatively stepped outside, reaching for the laser gun on her belt. The prince hopped out after her without waiting for her confirmation that it was safe. She sighed. This was why she could never relax. Her charge was too reckless for his position. She swore someday she was going to develop a migraine and it was going to be all his fault. She grabbed him by the back of his shirt, annoyed. "Your highness! I really must insist you take out your wench, just in case something should happen. I don't think it's safe here."

"It's Shiz, remember? How many times do I have to tell you we have to stay incognito, Mika?" He said, pulling his shirt from her grasp instead of reaching for his weapon.

She grabbed him by the ear and yanked downwards, to make sure he was listening. "And how many times must tell you, sire, that I am calling you no such thing. It is beneath your status, and it is beneath mine for you to call me so familiarly. Iwaku has a number of subcountries, no one will think twice about me calling you prince and you are well aware of this. Don't use this journey as an opportunity to try and change our stations and shirk your responsibilities. Now. Bring out your wench. I don't have time to babysit you if a whole group of people attack."

"I'd say you already kind of count as my wench." He joked, but pulled what looked like a little pill bottle out of his pocket anyways. He flipped the cap open and a small woman floated out, a fairy-sized creature without wings. She floated by his shoulder, a glowing, ghostly blue color. The little woman said nothing, making no indication that she had any thought or emotion, but she was much more powerful than she looked.

Mika put her hands on her hips and leaned back on her heels, looking around and relaxing slightly. A loud caw startled her back into wariness, though. Her eyes alighted on a single bird, perched atop the tent cabin across from them. This was a rather odd thing, because it was the only sign of life anywhere in the vicinity. There were no other birds or squirrels, she didn't think she even saw a single insect flying or crawling about. Taking out a spyglass, she put it up to her eye and inspected the bird. It wasn't just a bird. It looked like a crow of some sort, but it looked to be made of some shiny metal, gears connecting its wings to the body. Its eye was a little red light that looked like the aperture of a camera. It was looking straight at her with one, beady camera eye. She scowled at it, and pointed her laser gun at it. It didn't look like a threat, but it did look exactly like the sort of thing someone might use to spy on people.

Before she could fire, however, the bird dove for her with a caw. She yelled and ducked, but it wasn't aiming for her. The prince yelled, and she whipped around to see the bird digging its claws into his back and starting to drag him off. He grabbed at his wench, trying to use it to channel his power to attack, but whatever this bird was, it was made of some powerful magic, because none of the prince's spells were working, and he had been trained in all sorts of magic since he was a child. It was not an easy thing to kidnap the heir to the throne of Amore. It also had to be really strong, because it looked no larger than a regular raven, and it was carrying him off with no apparent trouble.

"Your highness!" She yelled in alarm, forgetting to be quiet. She fired a couple shots, but didn't want to risk hitting the prince. She threw a tracing device with all her might, and to her relief it latched onto the prince's clothes. Taking out the machine that followed the tracing device, she ran after the bird, hardly noticing as she raced straight through the glowing barrier they had slipped through, the barrier that wasn't supposed to let anyone out.

Grene had lost all sense of time making batches of the antidote. While only a small vial was going to be needed per person, so far as she could tell, she could only brew one stone bowl at a time, which was only enough for a few vials. She had been working nonstop for hours, and only now was she finishing up. Applo had offered no assistance, but he had stayed with her all night long, a still tree. His roots did not dig too deeply into the ground, though. The sickness that was infecting Imvadrim and spreading to the creations of the gods was overwhelmingly evident in the soil of Imvadris, and even just standing there was starting to affect him. As she finished mixing her last batch, however, he took a step forward again as a humanoid.

"So, it is time." He said, formally.

Grene smiled at him, lifting her bowl from the dais. "Let's hope this works." With no further ado, she poured the contents of the entire bowl all over the little stand. The viscous yellow substance dripped down the ancient stone slowly, staining and covering it at first, but then gradually being absorbed into it. The two of them watched anxiously. As soon as every last drop sank into the stone, the ground trembled. A high, keening shriek reverberated around the clearing, replacing the unsteady beat. The strange plants that had been littered around the area changed back to their normal form, but suddenly, almost painfully snapping into place or being flooded with color. Grene dropped the bowl, and both Grene and Applo covered their ears and had to step back not to be bowled over. Applo seemed to feel it particularly strongly, being forced to one knee to keep himself steady.

When the shrieking was finished, the steady thump-thump of the heartbeat had returned as it should, and the clearing appeared normal again, but Grene sensed there was still something strange about the place.

"Welcome, young one." A stately woman's voice rumbled and echoed loudly enough to give Grene a headache, but she could not tell if it was being said in her head or out loud. Applo lowered his head, still on one knee, so she knew who had spoken.

Grene sank to one knee as well, lowering her head. "I-Imvadrim?" She asked, adrenaline forcing the breath from her lungs.

"That is my name." The cold response was ever so slightly amused. "Your kind has never trespassed upon these lands before, a child of mine does not lightly suffer guests in this secret place."

"If I offended you, Sacred Mother, I apologize. Only the height of need could have brought me here." Grene said, trying to hide the nervousness in her voice.

A light, oddly robotic chuckle filled the air. "There is no need to fear. I know of your troubles, and you have done me a great service. Nor would I seek to punish one who holds the spirit of one of my children." Only Grene knew she was talking about Norlathel. "But I sense that healing is not the only reason for your coming. Tell me. What else do you seek, that you would come so far to speak with me?"

For a moment, Grene hesitated, but then Applo reached over and nudged her. He was not an impatient creature, but there was no keeping the Mother waiting. "I- I don't know." She said, for she had many questions on her heart, but it was only now was she realizing that she sought answers. "There is no peace for the land." She started, slightly overwhelmed. "Ever since the gods arrived here, we have changed things, and never for the better. Everything that has been, the darkness that this could end in. Not even the Bringer of Fates knows what will happen. Our wrongs can lead this world to its end."

The echoey voice cut her off. "How like your kind it is to let your worries of the past become your worries of the future, when you have the power to change neither."

That response stunned her into silence temporarily, but Imvadrim waited for her expectantly. "I guess… so. It's just. How can we be expected to do nothing, to accept the change as it happens?" She crinkled her brows in frustration. "Either everything shall end now, or we shall remain here again, forever waiting for the next catastrophe, dreading an death that may not come. Sometimes it feels like that is the fate of an Immortal."

"Immortal?" Grene looked up, automatically searching for the source of the voice in her surprise. "No. We do not call your kind Immortal. We call you the Frozen, for you do not change. You do not forget. You drown in memories as if they had just happened. Your people hold old grudges, little one. Here. Let me show you. Fragment of the Invaders. Fatherless Child. The Namer has granted me the chance to show you their nightmares." As the voice faded away, images began to flood into Grene's head. She clutched her throbbing skull between her hands and curled into a ball, trying to suppress the rush of thoughts that were not hers.

Nightmares, she had said. These were memories.
 
Chapter 5 - The Flashbacks Start in Earnest

Earnest Bay, Two Miles off the Shore of Iwaku, 83 years ago

Tari's whole body hurt. She awoke with a groan in the dark, an awful lurching movement telling her she was no longer on solid ground. She was sitting upright on something hard, her hands wrapped around some kind of stick and bound in front of her, her tail uncomfortably squashed up against the hard surface behind her. She couldn't see much, the only light being moonlight slanting in through a small porthole to her left. When she tried to move her numb hands, a heavy clanking alerted her to the chains securing her to some sort of railing. She turned her head to look around her, but that just brought on a dizzying headache.

"Hey." Someone next to her whispered.

She tried to speak in reply, to at least ask them to shut up, because every sound made her head throb, but she could barely bring her cracked lips to part, much less force sound from her painfully dry throat.

"Heyyy." The person next to her said again, this time giving her a little shove with their shoulder. "I know you're awake. You're new, right?"

How anyone could sound so cheerful while in the situation they were in escaped Tari entirely. It was also grating on her nerves, especially since she still could not work past the dryness in her throat to respond with more than a grunt.

The girl kept talking, too. "I'm Kimberly, but you can call me Kim. I've been here for three days. Martin was my old partner, but he was getting pretty old and he's worked in this galley his whole life, so it was only a matter of time before he died. But I heard about you. They paired you up with me because you're an Iwakuan, too! There aren't any other Iwakuans on board this ship. It's really not so bad here if you're strong enough to take it. I'm extra strong because I'm half-Immortal, half-dragon. Plus, that's why they're treating me extra special nicely. They're planning to sell me off once they get far enough from Iwaku. I don't think they've been to Iwaku before; they seem pretty eager to get away before someone catches them."

"Can you be quiet?" Tari finally managed to croak. She finally turned her head to look at the girl next to her, her eyes adjusting to the dim lighting. The girl was hard to see, but she could still see that she was similar in age, and was smiling. It may have also been the pale light, but this Kim seemed really tired. It immediately made Tari feel kind of bad for snapping at her just for being a good sport in the face of bad circumstances.

That bad feeling was instantly swept away when the girl just grinned and went right on chattering. "I'm really glad to have another Iwakuan to talk to, no one on this ship can speak enough of the language to really get a conversation going, so it's just been really really boring having no one to talk to and also Martin wasn't much of a talker so he never even really tried. Maybe they'll sell you in the same place as me! It'll be nice to have another Iwakuan around."

"Seriously. My head really hurts." Tari muttered.

"Oh, sorry." Kim said, sounding concerned, but not exactly contrite. "That'll probably go away after you get some sleep, or when they get you something to eat for breakfast."

"By Galer, do you ever stop talking?" The more she talked, the easier it was getting, though that didn't mean her throat or head hurt any less.

Someone behind them hissed a protest in an unfamiliar language and kicked their bench with a quiet thud. Tari had to say, she agreed with them. It was the middle of the night, and these conditions were difficult enough as it was to sleep in. She was about to snap at Kim again, but then the other girl scooted her hands down the railing they were bound to and grabbed Tari's fingers with a couple of her own. The touch seemed to calm Tari immediately and clear her mind, though she couldn't say why. The lizard girl realized her fellow Iwakuan was shaking, maybe from cold, maybe from fear. She squinted through the darkness to examine Kimberly again. Her new look didn't reveal many more details, except that it was now clear it was exhaustion she had seen on the other girl's face, earlier, not just the lighting. "Let's stick together, okay?" Kim said, still smiling, but Tari finally got it: the girl was absofuckinglutely terrified.

She sighed and let her better nature take over. "Okay, fine. Let's stick together, then. As fellow Iwakuans. I'm Tari. I'm pretty sure I'm an Immortal, too."

She saw the surprise on the other girl's face, and grimaced slightly at the inevitable next question. "You're pretty sure?"

"Well yeah." She said, bluntly. "I've been alone pretty much as long as I can remember. I used to live in the Creacon Forest, and a nice family took me in for a bit after a while. They said I grow too slowly to be anything but an Immortal, and they died a few years ago. I'm not really sure how old I am."

Unlike the pity she had come to expect, Kim's response was somewhat flippant after hearing this whole story. It was kind of a relief, really. "Oh, me neither. The Immortal I was raised by said he'd rescued my egg, but he never told me when I hatched and how he knew I was half-half. It never really seemed important, but then he just disappeared one day." There was a wobble in her voice, but she plowed on with the affected good cheer she'd kept up during the whole conversation. "I've been looking for him ever since. That was how they caught me, you know. I was in Onone and someone said they'd seen someone matching his description. I should've known better, but they ambushed me at the meeting place and that's how I ended up here."

"You thought someone knew who it was from a description?" Tari asked in disbelief, slowly forgetting her headache and earlier irritation.

Kim blushed, the reddish hue visible against her pale skin even in the moonlight. "Well, he looks pretty distinctive. He's got a mustache and this kind of annoying 'I-know-everything" smirk. You'd know it if you saw it." She added, with a sheepish mutter, "And I couldn't exactly tell them his name, since I never got it...."

That threw Tari for a loop. "Wait a second, you were raised by some man who never even told you his name, and one day he up and abandons you, and you still go looking for him?" She stared at Kim, nonplussed.

For the first time, the other girl seemed to really get upset. "Well, what was I supposed to do?" She snapped, forgetting for a second to whisper. "I don't have anyone else."

Tari set her jaw, suddenly angry at everyone. These kidnappers planning to sell them off, the parents who had left her to fend for herself her whole life, the mortal village that had pushed her out as soon as the nice couple had died, and this mysterious man who had raised a girl just to abandon her without leaving her the slightest explanation or recourse. She gripped Kim's fingers back, the anger energizing her and washing away more of the fuzzy-headedness. "Well, you've got me, now." She said, in a determined fashion. "And we're going to be fine. You'll see, we're going to be just fine."


"Eo, Eo!" The shrill female voice was accompanied with a sharp knocking on the door. The woman was bouncing on the balls of her feet impatiently, standing next to a small boy with white hair and expressionless eyes on the front porch. The house was a simple affair of wood, an unexceptional building with a small plaque on the top announcing that it was, "The abode of E.L. Anthill," but it was impossibly situated on a steep cliff overlooking a waterfall, the water pouring from the bottom of the porch.

E.L. greeted his unwelcome guest with one of his usual, cheerful smiles, reaching up to ruffle his hair with a yawn. "Well, well, well well. Who do we have here?" He asked, with a mischievous twinkle in his eye. "If it isn't Tywyll Niran herself. Didn't you say you were never speaking to me never ever again?" He didn't sound much perturbed by her breaking her oath.

She scowled at him and got straight to business. "I need your help." She snapped.

"Anything for you, my friend. What can I do you for?" His helpful attitude only seemed to anger her further, but she kept her temper under control.

Taking a breath, she took the little boy next to her by the hand and dragged him forward into the spotlight. He looked up at the Bringer of Fates boldly, appearing not to care a whit who Eo was. "This boy," she said a little breathlessly, "I need you to take care of him for me. It'll just be for a little while, while I go finish cleaning up the Immortal Hunter's latest little mess." She was still scowling, as if it was his fault the Immortal Hunter was starting to pre-emptively slaughter creations of the God of Plenty. It partially was, but that was a well-kept secret she was not privy to.

"Oooh." Eo said, squatting down to see the boy better. "You trust me the mostest to take care of some kid you picked up as a pet project? And here I thought you took all of your pet projects very seriously." He said, almost teasingly.

The woman stamped her foot in clear frustration. "I'm leaving him with you because I don't have anyone else to leave him with. The others are banding together to lead a group up the mountain to try and get rid of the Immortal Hunter once and for all. I can't leave him with Shana, she has problems enough with her children teething, and those left behind all have someone to worry about. No one for miles has time or space to properly take care of a kid except for you, because everyone else actually cares about what happens in our community. Besides, I'll be back for him when we take care of her. Just take care of him until then, okay?" She shoved the boy over the threshold, practically kicked Eo back into his own home, and turned to leave.

She paused to give one last parting shot. "Oh yeah, and don't you ever ever talk to or about Fish again, you hear me? You don't even deserve to say her name." She gave him one last glare and slammed the door shut in his face.

The boy stared at the slammed door, then looked up at his new guardian. "That lady doesn't like you."

"Nope! She doesn't at all." E.L. said, without skipping a beat, turning around with a smile still on his face and heading to the kitchen of his small house.

"Why?" The boy asked, not truly sounding all that curious.

The older Immortal paused for a moment, looked down at him, and spoke with a light tone. "Well, you see, Ano Taku. She wanted to know her fate, because I can see that, if it's important enough. I knew she wouldn't like it, but I never ever lie when someone wants to know, and she demanded I tell her, so I told her that she was going to kill her sister in an act of mercy, and then take her own life many years later, when everyone she cared about was dead!"

The heavy statement didn't seem to weigh either person down, and the boy plowed on. "Can you tell my fortune?"

E.L. had to stop and think about that for a second, eyes glazing over as he accessed the complex network of threads that would give him an insight into what people thought of as the inevitable future. He cocked his head to the side, squinted down at the little boy and then shook his head brightly. "No, it seems you're not going to be very important in the grand scheme of things, kid. You'll probably die in some nameless place with no one to mourn for you, like most people will."

Ano Taku didn't even blink at the callous statement, still staring at E.L. with that steady, empty gaze. "Aren't you going to mourn for me? Since you're my friend now."

The Bringer of Fates just laughed and fetched him a sandwich. "Why would I do that, little boy? I'm the Bringer of Fates. I do what is necessary and never mourn anyone." He patted the kid on the head. "If you live to see the end of this age, you'll see. I know what's supposed to happen, and it's my job to see it through, no matter who gets in the way, no matter whose turn it is to fall." He didn't know what expression he was making, though he assumed it was the same smile as always, but Grene could see it all. As the vision melted away, she thought she'd never seen him look so sad. She rather thought that when he said he never mourned anyone, he was also saying he mourned everyone. The boy seemed to know it, too, but he kept it to himself.


~~

"I don't understand." Grene told Imvadrim, still clutching her head and struggling to get the words out. The headache had subsided slightly with the end of the memory, but she could tell this was not the end of them just yet. "Why are you showing me this?"

Imvadrim responded slowly, taking her time with her answer, though it sounded as if she had known what she was going to say right from the beginning. Whatever point she was trying to make didn't really answer her question, either. "The Namer gave him the title the Bringer of Fates not because of his duty, but because of the consequences of his choices. He is a pitiful child who confused what could be with what should be, and only now tries to turn away from a road he has traveled too far down. He has too long sought a specific truth, when truth has no bounds, and cares little for your needy hearts."

"How do you know so much about the Namer?" Grene asked, tiredly. "She died many thousands of years ago, and there is no indication she ever interacted with the land." She muttered these facts mostly because she couldn't bring herself to address the comments on E.L. himself. It hurt too much to delve too deeply into.

Imvadrim seemed to mull over the question for a moment, and Grene could feel it as if Imvadrim was living in her own head. She began to consider that standing on Imvadris too long was starting to bring them in sync, a phenomenon she was perhaps uniquely susceptible to as the Creation of the God of the Land. "You have many questions you would not have, had you asked better ones many years ago." The Earth Mother did not sound upset as she spoke her stinging criticism, more curious, really. "Come, we have much more to see."

"This is a bad idea." The disapproving male voice seemed to come from the middle of nowhere, reverberating in a stony valley inhabited by nothing but small, hardy shrubs.

"Why?" Thundered a second voice in the empty valley.

"Form. Why have you let one of your creepy creations lecture us about making one more?" The third voice sounded annoyed, but the second cut short any further objections.

"I asked him a question, Flame. Let him speak."

There was a moment's pause, as the first speaker waited to be interrupted, then he continued, "Three of you have never made Immortal creations before, and making another for you, God of Form, would be a mistake after Sophie-"

"So I'm a mistake now?" The tone was light, but there seemed to be a tinge of hurt in it as Nemo spoke, no more substantial than the rest of them.

The third voice, identified as Flame, sounded even grumpier than before, and seemed to refuse to address either Nemo or Jorick. "So you brought both of your strange Immortals to interfere, Form. I thought you were the one who wanted to try making a formless multi-fathered."

"That was Caprice's idea," Form said, calmly. Clarifying what had been said, but not speaking petulantly, "and I did not invite either of them here."

Jorick popped into physical form and sat down in the valley and Nemo followed suit, both taking on their preferred forms of a cocky-looking man and a teenage girl respectively. "Why do you guys even want to help make an Immortal? You haven't before." Jorick asked, crossing his arms across his chest, eyebrows raised in a less-than-deferential expression.

A nearby shrub caught fire, the flames bulging and stretching far higher than should've been possible. "HOW DARE YOU QUESTION US, IMMORTAL?" The God of Fire roared.

There was a creepy giggle from yet another voice, bringing the count up to five. "Now, now, no need to get angry, Fire. He was just asking." Caprice didn't oblige them with a physical form, but turned into a large ball of multi-colored light. His wheedling, needling voice was just one of many features that made him very unpopular company. "Well, it seems fun this time, doesn't it? I didn't feel like it, but now I do. I've been talking to that one with the blue hair, and they really are interesting little creatures."

"You've been talking to the Creation of the God of Threads?" The God of Form's voice snapped with some little alarm.

The God of Caprice chuckled in an unnerving fashion. "A creation after my own heart, as expected of Threads. Wouldn't you like to know what he has to say about the fate of your creations?"

A drawn out sigh introduced a new individual. "Are we doing this or not? Get on with it." Nemo kind of agreed. She'd only come along because she had wanted to see this new creation. The God of Form had sworn never to make another one after she had turned out to be such a "disappointment." There had to have been some reason he'd changed his mind.

"Who invited Sea again?" Fire asked aggressively, not directly addressing the 6th voice, but sounding as disgruntled by it as he'd been about the two Immortals.

There was another little laugh from the God of Caprice, "Me, of course! Stop asking that, Fire. We've talked about it already! Now then. On to the main event!" No one had a chance to say anything further, because the colorful ball of light began wobbling in a strange, oblong fashion. It wiggled and began stretching itself slowly out until the tiniest little drop split from the rest.

"Hey! Warn us before you start doing that!" Fire genuinely sounded alarmed, the enormous bonfire hastily making an effort to extract a single lick of flame. The God of Water did not take on any sort of form, but a tiny little drop of water joined the other two pieces.

"Well then? Hurry up and add yours before they disperse and die, Form." Sea said impatiently.

The God of Form did not bother with a retort, but it seemed to take him a bit longer than the others. It was almost imperceptible at first, but a strange net seemed to creep over the other three pieces, engulfing them and solidifying into something that was not solid, liquid, or gas, but somehow oddly in between all three. The whole ball turned sort of transparent, but also distinctly visible, the way glass sometimes was. Then, just like that, it vanished. Rather, it appeared to vanish. The God of Form and his two creations weren't fooled.

"Hey. What happened, Form? Did it die?" The fire seemed to crackle almost nervously on the bush.

"No." Sophie said, looking up at it with some interest. "What did you all put in it, though? It's horrible." Her voice didn't sound at all like she thought it was horrible, but that was because her definition of horrible had nothing to do with how it made her feel. She could see the new Immortal forming itself from the pieces of the gods. Most Immortals simply absorbed the pieces of the gods they were given, but most Immortals also had forms already. She hadn't existed when Jorick had been created, so she didn't have a good frame of reference for other formless Immortals, but for sure she hadn't fought with herself the way this thing was doing. The shards of the Gods of Fire and Water were alternately attacking each other and beating themselves against the walls of the makeshift soul the God of Form had made. The God of Caprice's piece kept changing shape and size and writhing unpleasantly. Even most multi-fathered Immortals resolved their birth shards into singular, whole fake-souls of some kind. If this thing resolved itself into one being, it was going to take a miracle. Ah. There it was. The various god-shards began to settle down. They didn't seem very happy about it, but they stopped fighting each other, and started getting absorbed into the walls of the piece the God of Form had provided, staining it many different colors. The colors snaked across the surface in inconsistent patterns, indicating that not all was well, but the being had managed to fight its way into life.

The Gods hadn't answered her – they really weren't in the habit of answering snippy little questions about what they chose to make an Immortal out of – but Sophie threw back her head and laughed. "Jorick was right! It's an abomination! It's a mistake. Just like me." Her words were bitter and the laugh had not really been amused.

"Why? What's wrong with it?" The God of Fire asked in gruff concern, clearly already interested in the little beast.

"What's wrong with what?" A light female voice asked curiously, surprising the gods who were not attuned to see non-gods without forms. Sophie was certain no one else caught it, but Jorick grimaced outright for just a second. She pursed her lips in a secret smile. He'd seen it, too, and he agreed with her. The invisible soul now floating above them was just as much of a mistake as she was, if not more. "Are you my papas?" The new one asked.

Both the Gods of Water and Fire attempted to interject, but the God of Form cut them both off. "Not exactly, little one. Why don't you try showing us a form? Here. Like this." The God of Form popped into existence the same way Jorick had, turning himself into the form of a young boy before vanishing again.

The new Immortal giggled in what must've been awe and excitement, and then she tried it to terrible effect. The first form she took on was that of an enormous fireball, but almost as if she couldn't sustain it, it changed rapidly. The fireball gave way to a tiny drop of water which morphed into an enormous lizard then some kind of bird with a woman's head. She flashed through multiple forms, most of fire and water, but some normal… or rather a perversion of normality. "STOP." The God of Form boomed, using his power to force the Immortal not to take on any more forms. That was probably the right choice, because as far as Nemo had seen, the little abomination couldn't stop herself. The soul floated where it was, silent and subdued. It was hard to tell if it was upset or not.

"Pick a single form you think you'd like and hold it there in your mind. Focus on it, make sure it doesn't waver, and then manifest." Form told her slowly. She didn't answer at first, and the other Gods also waited with bated breath for something to happen. Very slowly, one of the shrubs wavered into being, finally solidifying at the center of the valley.

"Is this right?" Her voice held no inflection or tone.

Form inspected the shrub, clearly bewildered. "Erhm… Well yes, but most take on mobile forms, customize their appearance to their liking."

The shrub morphed slowly into the figure of… Jorick. "Well how about this?" She asked, looking up at the souls of the Gods surrounding her.

"Well, like I said, most customize them to what they personally prefer." The God of Form tried again, but the little Immortal looked up at him with very certain eyes and spoke frankly.

"I can't. This happens when I try to do what I like." The popping and flashing and changing of forms this way and that resumed and the God of Form had to stop her again, this time freezing her in the form of a small bird made completely of fire. She looked at him again, abruptly changing the conversation. "I'm…… itchy."

The Gods "looked" at each other. "Wh-What does she mean itchy?" The God of Fire asked in a half-whisper.

"I SAID I'M ITCHY." She said again, then the fiery bird exploded outwards, sending a shockwave out in all directions. Yes, Nemo could see it clearly, indeed. The colors of the soul were fighting each other again. She understood then, vaguely. The Black and White had had no difficulty coming into being because the light and the dark balanced each other out. There were always shadows where there was light. In some sense they could co-exist, but fire and water by nature were always trying to destroy each other. Neither could peacefully exist with the other, and the whimsical will of the God of Caprice would never allow that to reach a stable equilibrium. At least, she thought it might be something like that. The poor thing was trying to destroy itself, and it was very unlikely it would ever stop.

Caprice couldn't see what was going on the way the Form folk could, but he seemed to understand the gist of it, because he gave a high-pitched giggle that swelled into a full-fledged laugh and said, "Your second creation is right, Form! It's a monster, an abomination. Kill it or it will eventually kill us. It's your choice." Just like that, he faded away, leaving the scene without taking any responsibility for what had happened.

The thing mimicked his high-pitched giggle, clearly setting Jorick even more on edge than ever before. So Caprice had known something like this would happen. It had all been an elaborate test. That immediately made Nemo lose interest and she stopped existing in that space. She had seen what she had wanted to see. The nasty little thing would be gone before the day was up. How the gods did like to play. She swore to herself then that she'd never be like them, whimsically making and destroying whatever they wanted, giving life and taking it as if it did not matter. Never.


This memory was black and white, shaking and cracking slightly as if the connection to it was poor. Unlike the other memories, Grene didn't feel at one with the rememberer. It was more like she was watching this one from a distance. A large procession of people were standing around a casket on what appeared to be a sunny day. She wasn't sure, precisely what she was supposed to be focusing on, so she examined everything. It took a bit of time, but slowly, she realized that this was a funeral for one of the Turtles. The family was numerous still, so this was before the family had started to fall into decay, but after the start of the Age of Mortals, when burials had become common custom. She got a bad feeling she knew whose funeral this was, and a look in the casket proved her right. This was the funeral of Tednise – the last heir of the Turtle family, the last one who had had power over the soul-sucking weeds. His death had signaled the family's downfall, Tryshtopher pursuing a feud with someone she had once called a friend, ignoring the fact that the rest of her family was slowly dying off in various wars or unfortunate accidents, as if the family were cursed. The creations of the God of Creatures and the God of Plants had both been powerful, fertile families in the beginning, and they had made it through even the Mid-Age relatively unscathed. It had always been something of a horrifying mystery why they had dwindled the way they had.

It was now she understood whose memory this was, and why it was different from the others. She went looking for Tryshtopher, who had died just the day before.

It didn't take long to find her. Trysh was standing at the front of the crowd, weeping bitterly. She looked as if she hadn't slept in days, and Grene felt horrible for her, but nothing about this memory particularly stood out to her. The other ones had all seemed to have something important happen. This was... well, it was just a funeral, like any other. The two women watched the funeral in silence, sitting through the people visiting the casket, it being lowered into the ground and covered up with dirt and flowers. No one made Trysh stand up and give some speech, though this was probably her job as the closest thing to the head of the family the Turtles had left. They all seemed to understand that she needed space.

When the funeral ended at last, Grene prepared to be thrust out of the memory again, as she had when the others had ended, but she wasn't. Nor did Trysh leave. More and more people trickled away until it was just Tryshtopher and Grene, standing in the dusty grey memory of a dead person. Time went by unbearably slowly.

Just when Grene was ready to look up and try yelling something at Imvadrim asking why she'd been brought here, a voice stopped her in her tracks. "I'm sorry for your loss." A soft voice said. It was clearly male, but delicate somehow, not exactly masculine. Both she and Trysh turned to look at this new intruder. It was... a man in a wheelchair, with soft, almost feminine features. He didn't look particularly special at first glance, but even in the memory, Grene realized something startling: one of his eyes was a mirror. He seemed to look straight at her, as if sensing her presence, but that was impossible. Memories couldn't see you. Nor was she reflected in his creepy mirror of an eye.

It worried her slightly that she had no idea who he was. Grene had been on good terms with most Immortals. By the time Tednise had died, she had already begun retreating into solitude in Grene's Bay, but even so she was well-acquainted with most people who had been old enough to attend Tednise's funeral. Trysh, on the other hand, seemed to know who he was, though it took her a moment to recall. "You're... Gwazi's great-uncle, right?" That explained the mirror-eye. Gwazi was a second-generation of the God of Reflections. This person must have been one as well. That still didn't explain why she didn't know who he was, though. She had known the creations of the God of Reflections pretty well.

He smiled lightly. "Yes, that's me." He looked over at the casket, a sympathetic look on his face. "I didn't know him well, but your brother was so young, the hope of the Turtle family. It's a shame he died."

That set Tryshtopher to shaking, a couple more tears spilling out. Grene had to wonder just how long she'd been crying and crying. She'd always felt exhausted after crying for a long time, she couldn't imagine doing it for this long, but she was a different sort of person from Tryshtopher, she supposed.

"Do you know how he died?" The unnamed Reflections creation asked.

Trysh cleared her throat unhappily. "It- A monster hunt went bad. I've always known there was the risk he'd get hurt, but Joan was with him. She'd always protect him. I know- I know he must have died protecting her." Her voice was shaking, and the grief was ripe in it, but the response startled Grene. It wasn't the response she'd expected from someone who had started a feud that had lasted for so long. "I wish I could tell her that. She must- blame herself."

The mirror-eyed man's response was calm, but startled both Trysh and Grene. "Where is she, then?"

"What?" Trysh asked in alarm.

"If this Joan blames herself so much, why isn't she here at his funeral to mourn him?" Grene wanted to yell at him, but again, memories couldn't see their spectators. Tryshtopher looked stunned.

"I- I don't-"

He smiled kindly and put his hand on Trysh's arm, a fatherly gesture that Grene didn't trust a whit. "Have you ever thought that, maybe it is her fault, after all? Everyone says that a D'Dark sword was found in his body." That outraged Grene, since she had never heard any such thing.

"W-well, yes, but-"

He leaned forward speaking in low, almost conspiratorial tones. "I don't want to speak poorly of someone your brother loved and trusted so much, but the D'Darks have always had a reputation for their violent tempers and warrior spirits. They're creations of the God of Darkness itself. Nothing ever good came from a D'Dark."

Tryshtopher jerked her arm away from him, and snapped, "My brother hated it when people talked like that." But Grene saw the damage had been done. Her voice was wavering slightly, the seed of doubt had been planted.

"Maybe," the man said, "that was his mistake."

"I think you'd better go." She told him stiffly.

He nodded his head respectfully. "Very well," he said, "but if you change your mind, if you ever need someone to talk to, just call." He slipped a small mirror into her somewhat unwilling hand. "Whatever you may think, I am on your side, and I know more about your brother than you might think." Grene wanted to point out that that statement contradicted his earlier one, when he had said he hadn't known Tednise very well. In his mirror eye, she saw a strange reflection, Tryshtopher was there, as she should be, but the reflection showed her moving her hands, speaking something as thin, green vines sprouted from the ground. Trysh saw it, too, and jerked backwards.

"What do you-" Before she could finish getting her question out, the man was gone, wheelchair and all. There wasn't even a dent in the grass where the marks of his wheels should have shown. He was simply gone, leaving Grene to wonder just who exactly he was, and what role he had played in the deaths of the two women, which she now suspected wasn't quite as simple a thing as a feud.


Jorick counted each one as they came. For every single god that came to die, screaming as Marissa traded their lives in the spell they had worked together to create, Jorick wrote a little note of their title and what number they were. One by one, they streamed in, and he did not miss a single one. It was a useful record, since they had had no way of knowing who was left after the War of the Gods, and who had died. When the last one floated in and none other came, Jorick had stared down at his list with his heart in his throat. He could not rightly say whether he felt sick or relieved that there had been no goddesses among the list. Of course, the Goddess of Life had been killed, the Goddess of Death had been locked away, but the Daughter.... No one knew what had happened to her, and he had held out hope- oh the irony of that- that she was alive.

"Are you looking for someone?" Asked a knowing voice to his right. Chanting was filling the air, Marissa wrapping up her bit of the spell, but it was not she who had spoken. He turned to look at the girl next to him, a slender woman with long black hair and grey eyes with neither pupil nor white, whose voice had sounded clearly despite the chanting. He scowled at her for using that form, as if to mock him. The Four-fathered had never used the Daughter's colorful eyes, but that was the only change she had made to the form of the woman he had trusted the most, heck had almost- He squelched the next thought immediately.

He turned away from her, refusing to look at her, but she spoke again, "She's not gone, you know. She's just... sleeping, awaiting her true love's kiss." He whipped his head around to look at her again, but she wasn't looking at him anymore. He had thought from her tone of voice that she might be grinning, but she had that expression on her face again, the one he had seen earlier when she had been watching the gods come. It was mostly impassive, but tinged with what he may have called sadness or wistfulness. There was something new there, too. He thought it might have been anger, but when he thought about it he realized that he'd never seen her angry. Sad was a rare occasion, but he'd seen that one before. Anger? That one was completely foreign, and he wasn't certain he was reading it correctly on her face, since he'd never seen it on the Daughter's, either.

He looked to his left, where a teenager with a pony tail was standing, and noticed that the two girls shared a glance. Nemo looked confused at first, but as the two of them looked at each other, an understanding passed between them, and her expression grew dark and dangerous. Here was another girl he'd never seen angry before, doing just that. It was an even odder phenomenon, because he knew that his two fellow creations did not get along at all. Not that they'd ever hated each other, and they were more similar than he'd ever dare accuse them of being to their faces, but they had seemed to come to an agreement, before the War of the Gods, that they would acknowledge each other's presence as little as possible. He'd never bothered to ask about it, since their business was their damn business, but that meant when they did directly agree to communicate with each other, something terribly wrong was afoot.

The chanting stopped, and all three of them looked back at Marissa, who was standing in the center of a chalk-drawn circle, wobbling on her feet with exhaustion. She was pale and shaking, an ashen tint to her skin and tears welling up in her eyes, and they all knew there was more to that at play than exhaustion, but none of them could move a muscle from their designated spots until the spell was complete. Just a little longer.... Knowing that there had been too few gods who had come, Jorick held a hand out to each girl and they grasped it, together channeling a large portion of Norlathel's power into the waiting spell.

By the end of it, Marissa had lost consciousness and collapsed onto the floor, and the three of them were hardly better off. Using more than a smidge of Norlathel's power had always been dangerous and tiring, and they had used more than anyone had ever had to before. They hadn't expected so few gods to be left, either. He dropped to his knees, but to his surprise, the Four-fathered moved right past him and Nemo, using the last vestiges of her strength to drag herself into the circle, before plopping herself down next to Marissa and curling up there to fall asleep.

He looked at Nemo again, to see how she was faring, and discovered that she was still standing just fine, but scowling with all of her might at the two women in the circle. "What is it?" He asked, alarmed to hear his voice croaking, and unable to think of something more articulate to say.

Nemo went right on scowling, but he thought he heard her mutter to herself, "Why didn't she let her die? She should have let her die. It would have been better if she'd died." That ominous statement was the last thing he heard, before his head collided with a stone floor he hadn't realized was coming closer, and he lost consciousness himself.


"So, what is this, exactly? A meeting of monstrous Immortals?" The kraken drawled, puffing on a small pipe.

"I'm not a monstrous Immortal!" The Dreamer protested. This was her memory, and Grene was glad to see it, because it had to mean she was alive. No one had seen Eliana Imera the Dreamer since the beginning of the Age of Mortals.

The kraken chuckled morosely, "So you say, Dreamer."

She, Diana, and the kraken were sitting around a massive round table. As each of them were in their native forms, this made for a rather unconventional dinner party. A large red squid with scarred, hardened skin, limbs tangled onto a strange pronged structure, a yellow dragon of equal size, with her tail curled languidly around herself, and a giant woman with skin of glowing, molten gold, leaning back on a massive wooden chair. They were a right trio of monstrous Immortals, alright. The golden woman was smiling, somehow simultaneously a youthsful and motherly expression, full of both kindness and excitable good cheer. "So why did you call us here, Diana?" She asked, a bit shy to say Diana's name, as she felt like she should use a more respectful title.

The dragon yawned, sharp teeth and forked tongue gleaming in the light of the Dreamer's skin. She seemed perfectly at ease, temporarily abandoning her spine of steel in the company of perhaps equals. "Well, that fancy new Immortal came to see me to ask me for help, but I wanted to know what you both thought of it."

"Thought of what?" The kraken asked, in a bored tone of voice.

"I was getting to that." Diana scolded lightly. "He had three requests. He asked me to help calm the mortals, and look for some artefacts to help them, and him. Little things that the dragons might be especially equipped to find. And the third request..." she paused and a gleam of clear displeasure entered her eye, "Was of a personal nature, and I do not care to repeat such blasphemy in polite company. I told him I would think about it, but I did wish to get your opinion on the matter, and more importantly the man."

The kraken slid around on his strange chair in a sort of shrugging motion. "What does it matter to us what the dragons do?" He asked, picking up a massive cup filled with some sort of frothy liquid, and setting it to his lips in a mockingly dainty fashion.

The dragoness bared her teeth in a sharp smile. "You ought to know that the dragons will do whatever they will do. We are not beholden to the rest of the Immortals, but that is precisely why I am asking the two of you. Neither of you have gotten very involved in the rest of their drama, either. In fact, I've rather heard you've even developed a friendship with the one they call the Immortal Hunter. All I ask is for your opinion of Norlathel. What sort of man is he?"

The kraken sighed and slid further into his weird little tree, but the Dreamer was more than happy to answer, "Oh, he's absolutely lovely!" She said, with a twinkle in her eye... a blinding phenomenon from a woman already glowing. "He's a perfect gentleman, and has never treated me like a monster at all! He's a bit of a wanderer, though, isn't he? Since he's part mountain I always thought, I don't know, that he'd be more stable and steadfast. But instead I see him here and there and everywhere, and goodness knows what he's always doing." She paused, before adding, "He's really the helpful sort. I think he's very caring, and whenever I see him, he always seems to be trying to help someone, but I've never really seen him be close to anyone, either. I don't think he'd ask you to do anything unless he really needed your help. I say you should help him."

Diana considered that assessment quietly, not quite taking it at face value, and Eliana pouted at her. She was probably thinking that the Dreamer was too naïve and trusting, or something. She knew all of them thought that sort of thing about her. The dragon turned to the kraken, instead. Well, if she was going to ask any two people for an assessment, it was a balanced group. As much as she liked the kraken, Eli knew he wasn't exactly the optimistic sort. He didn't really think well of many people that easily. "And what about you? What do you have to say about it?" Diana asked him.

He didn't answer for a while, continuing to do obnoxious things like smoke bubbles from his pipe or sip his drink as if it had been served to him at a tea party. "I don't really have any opinion on it."

The Dreamer almost opened her mouth to protest, and she saw Diana's scaled brows rise slightly from their place above her eyes. She'd never really thought about dragons raising their eyebrows before. It was oddly fascinating to watch. "You say this, as one of the Gates of Norlathel?" Diana asked in both incredulity and no small amusement.

He snorted and a bubble came popping out of one of his tentacles, which Eli thought rather gross. "I only became a Gate because Anaia Tsukasa told me she'd stop trying to eat me for a few centuries. I'm not afraid that she'll succeed, but it gets tiresome to have to watch my back all the time. She promised me it wouldn't affect anything else in my life, too, and like a fool I took her at her word. Now the damn woman is asking me for another favor. Something about 'experimenting with new life forms.' It's outrageous, honestly." He sounded thoroughly disgruntled, as if he'd been waiting to make that rant for months.

The dragon cast him a startled glance that the Dreamer was surprised and confused to see. What was so worrying about the Immortal Hunter asking the kraken for help? She'd always been a bit of an odd duck, with odd duck tastes, and the experimenting with new life forms thing was probably just another one of those. Plus, as Diana herself had pointed out, the two had some sort of friendship, if you could call it that. It made perfect sense for her to be asking the kraken for help with one of her little projects. She didn't get to find out what was on Diana's mind, however, because the dragon kept those thoughts to herself, redirecting the conversation back to its original purpose. "Is it really that difficult for you to provide a simple opinion on Norlathel? You are the one out of the three of us who has interacted with him the most. You must have some sort of feel for him."

He waved a tentacle in annoyance and finally conceded, "Yes, yes, just as Dreamer said, he's a normal, quiet, helpful little elf. In other words, he's a moron, and he keeps dying left and right, like it's fun for him to die to save other people. I'm sure he'll be very grateful for whatever you do to help, and you'd probably fall straight in love with him if you ever talked to him."

Diana didn't comment on his sarcastic tone of voice. She simply smiled and rose from her spot on the floor. "That is good to hear, then. I will trust both of your judgments and accede to his requests, as odd as they sound." The kraken just shrugged again, as if it didn't have anything to do with him, but the Dreamer brightened considerably (literally) and became downright unbearable to look at. If they hadn't been a dragon and a kraken, one of them would have probably caught fire.

She stood up from her chair and moved to exit with her. "I'll help you! I'm sure you could use some help finding those artefacts. As long as you don't think he minds if I tag along."

"Oh, I don't think he'll mind the extra help, dear." Diana said, kindly, before beginning to describe some of the items he had asked for. She said nothing about the request that had disturbed her so much and Eliana didn't press the issue. She did turn her head as they were leaving, however, to see if the kraken felt inclined to join them. Somewhat to her disappointment, he didn't look the least bit interested. He took another puff of his pipe, and this time seemed to watch the bubbles carefully, as if imagining what they'd look like if they were alive. It was a funny thought, and Eli startled Diana with a laugh before the doors banged shut behind them.


Nav shifted in her seat uncomfortably, regretting her decision more and more with every second that stretched by. Grene had tried everything she could to dissuade her from coming to see the Bringer of Fates, but the Navigator had known, from the moment she'd met him that it would someday come to this. She'd known, because he'd looked straight at her, and she'd seen him go into some kind of trance, mouthing words to himself without seeming to realize he was doing it. Back then, there had been nothing but peace, and she hadn't really understood why his little trance had made her so uneasy, but it was clear to her now. She had some sort of horrible fate awaiting her, and it was time she worked up the courage to find out what it was.

He knew why she was here. He had positively sparkled when she'd shown up on his front step, and she could tell he was just waiting for her to say the word for him to break out whatever fortune he'd seen for her so many years ago. Her tail twitched and brushed against the floor, and she realized that the tip of it was a little stiff. She looked down and saw there was a little blood caught in her fur. She'd missed it when she'd been washing the blood frantically from her face and hands.

Her look didn't escape E.L.'s notice. "So which number was it?" He asked, brightly.

"What?" She asked him in surprise, the first time she'd spoken since coming inside and sitting down.

"Which number was the Norlathel you just killed? This isn't the first time, right?" He asked, cheek on palm, smiling knowingly.

Nav shot upwards, causing the chair she was sitting on to fall backwards with a loud smack of wood on wood. Her fox tail swished uncomfortably in the air. She didn't try to say anything, though, heart stuttering in her chest. It was just as she'd expected after all. Her fate had something to do with Norlathel, and why she kept killing him. The second time was a freaky coincidence, a third was a trend. Swallowing the lump in her throat, she finally managed to answer, "Third. This is the third Norlathel I've killed, but I don't know if I'm the only-" A tiny note of hopefulness slipped into her voice without her noticing.

E.L. squashed that hope immediately. "Oh, it's just you. No one else can kill Norlathel."

Nav leaned down and picked the chair up, sitting back down on it. As only her third time killing Norlathel, she was far less freaked out about it than Grene had seen her in a while. Grene had forgotten how Nav had looked back then, more sure of herself even on land. She was concerned and confused, but less shaky at the idea than she would become. "What do ye mean by that? Why wouldn't anyone else be able to kill Norlathel?"

"Oh, it's no special reason," he said, flippantly, "it's because you're the Creation of the God of Time. Norlathel is a mountain. You can't really kill those, just break them down over time."

She frowned at him, not expecting the explanation to be so simple. Getting straight to the point, she finally said it. "So. What is my fate, then? You know, don't you?"

"Hrm." Rather than whip out some fancy scroll like she'd expected, it seemed E.L. had to think about it for a bit. "Well, maybe I do, but maybe I'm not supposed to tell you."

In a flash, Nav had grabbed E.L. by the lapel, dragging him closer. "I'd think about your answer a little more carefully, if I were you. You've been taunting me all this time with what you know, and now you won't tell me. Is that what you're saying?"

The blue-haired Immortal didn't seem worried. She supposed he shouldn't be. She might have been better at combat, but the amount of magic he could do with a simple twitch of his fingers made him nearly invincible. That only made her angrier. She shook him slightly, recklessly risking making him angry. He didn't get angry, though. He was as cheerful and pleased to see her as ever. "If you really want to know your fate that badly, I guess I can tell you. You are the Bane of Norlathel. He will be drawn to you in times of trouble, and you will kill him again and again, to complete a cycle of death and rebirth he requires. And someday you will kill him for good, and a piece of yourself will die. You are going to break time itself, and you won't even realize you've done it."

Stunned, Nav let him go. He was laughing. He had avoided telling her the prophecy in its proper wording, but he had told her enough, just enough to cast her into despair for a long, long time.


Marissa waded through what felt like a sea of corpses, her scales out in front of her. There was not a living soul but hers for miles. Even she wouldn't have dared to test her skills against the mortal hordes. She had seen what that kind of arrogance had done to the gods. The mortals were dangerous, especially since she already had a physical form. Using her scales, she converted the rotting bodies to fertile dirt. There was so much excess, that a few small trees even popped into existence. As she worked, she found a tear sliding down her cheek. She hated how easily she cried, but she couldn't be impervious like the others. She couldn't see the mortals as just monsters, either. True, they'd never shown much emotion besides that frenzied bloodlust, but that only made her feel pity for them. It would have been easy to be angry with them if they'd shown some sense of agency, but they were running on the only instincts the gods had given them. Even the monsters were better than that.

What did make her angry was that no one had listened to her. They hadn't paid her any attention when she'd warned them that the balance of the world was already heavily out of tilt, nor when she'd told them that this would only make things worse. Over all of her objections, the gods and Immortals had teamed up to create and take advantage of these half-formed creatures. This was the result. She clenched her fist and the scale tipped suddenly to one side, a massive tree shooting into existence, while several bodies and a chunk of the earth disappeared. Oops.

"I like this tree." The voice was a familiar one, and Marissa shook with anger, several other trees popping into existence as she lost control of her temper a little more. She looked up to see the Immortal Hunter sitting in the new little tree, wearing her preferred form of the Daughter. For reasons she'd never really understood, Anaia had always liked her, sticking to her as much as possible, no matter how clear she made it that the feeling was not mutual. It was even more frustrating that the creations of the God of Form could just come and go as they pleased, making it impossible for anyone to detect them or keep them out when a little privacy was wanted. Jorick, at least, had always had the good courtesy not to intrude with such aplomb, but neither of the women seemed to share that good will.

"Someday, this is going to be a mighty forest." Anaia continued, seemingly oblivious to Marissa's obvious rage. "And these trees will be the oldest and most magical of them, fueled with many blood sacrifices."

"Go away, Anaia." Marissa shouted up at her.

The other girl hopped down from the tree, instead, landing softly right in front of Marissa. "I will, I will, I promise! I just wanted to check on you, first. I know you haven't exactly taken all of this well, but I-"

She didn't get to finish that sentence, because Marissa punched her square in the face, fighting back tears. She wanted to yell, ask how she was supposed to have taken it, if it was expected of her to go around killing gleefully like Anaia and Nemo did, or cower or kill herself like others had chosen to. Sometimes she did want to kill herself, if she had to admit it, but she had a responsibility. The God of Balance had left her, his only creation, a duty to take care of the balance of the world, and certainly no one else could be trusted with it. The string of horribly stupid decisions that had led them to their current predicament was clear proof of that, to her. She said none of it, not trusting that this particular person would understand a lick of it.

The look on Anaia's face was unusually grim and serious, but she didn't look angry about the blow. She just touched her face gingerly for a second, then continued. "I was going to say, that I have a message for you that might make you feel better."

"From who?" Marissa asked, skeptically. There really wasn't anyone stupid or daring enough to trust the Immortal Hunter with a message. Jorick, maybe, but he would've sent one of his Egos to do it.

"It doesn't matter who it's from." She said, brushing herself off unnecessarily. "I was instructed to tell you that your burden is not yours to carry alone, anymore. You were right. You've always been right." The look in her eyes was strange, as if it was really someone else talking through her. "The time for your tears will end, soon, if you let us help you. Put down your scales, dear one. Take up the sword."

Being called "dear one" was so totally weird that Marissa took a step back. She let out a small breath, confusion written all over her face. Then, she gritted her teeth, reminding herself of who she was talking to. "I don't want your help. Not the help of whoever it is that sent you here, either. You're one of the balance breakers in the first place. You'd only make things worse."

The other girl seemed to come back to herself, blinking rapidly before responding. "I agree. I never wanted to be a balance breaker as you say, but I mean, what would you expect, really? My parents being who they are. But well, it's not really up to me." She waved a hand in a little circle in the air, her gaze sharpening on Marissa for a moment. "You know. I understand what you're carrying better than you think." She stopped herself abruptly and shrugged, as if exasperated with herself. "Never mind, but do know that I care about you, Rissa. More than most. We all do." She twisted on her heels and disappeared with a pop.

Alone again, the Keeper of the Scales went back to clearing the corpses and setting the foundation for what would one day become an ancient forest. When she was done, however, she scanned the area carefully, and then held her hands out in front of her. So far as most people knew, she was called the Keeper of the Scales because of the scales that manifested when she used her innate power: the ability to do anything, as long as the effects are balanced. Only a select few knew the truth. The old-fashioned metal scales in front of her glowed blue and began to turn into pure light, growing larger and larger until they stood tall as a mountain, towering pillars of entwined light, writhing and shifting, in constant flux. Her eyes glowed the same color, and the mark appeared on her forehead, mimicking the scales in front of her, blazing against her tawny skin.

The scales were noticeably out of balance, one side listing almost all the way down to the ground, but she wouldn't have been the Keeper if that was all she could see. Her eyes picked out details in the light, almost-imperceptible swirling patterns of things only she understood, scrawling their way across the entire surface of the scales. No one could tell the future but the Bringer of Fates, but the scales told Marissa more about the current state of the world than anyone else could discern. In a way, it could be said that they could sense a shift in the winds of the world. What she saw there furrowed her brow. The scales were sensing a shift slowly back towards a more balanced state, but there was some sort of finality about the way they were tilted, as if no matter what happened, nothing was going to right itself any time soon. They seemed to be waiting for something, and not at all prepared to end that waiting any time soon. She caught the inside of her mouth between her teeth, trying to figure out what she was supposed to do to rectify the situation. No answer came to her, only the words spoken earlier, "Put down your scales, dear one. Take up the sword." She scowled, hating herself for considering it, and never realizing that the words had been spoken aloud, drifting on the wind in a very different voice from that of its deliverer.


~~

Grene's eyes popped open. With a start, she realized that she was lying on her side, the cold ground surrounding her. Imvadris had started to bury her, right there, attempting to swallow her whole. Applo was looking down at her with his glowing eyes. He didn't look worried, and made no move to help her, so she had to shove aside the dirt, digging herself out of the ground. It was harder than usual, because Imvadris didn't seem to listen to the magic that was usually so helpful in any operation that required the movement of the earth. As she frantically dug, she spoke rapidly, her thoughts a complete jumble. "It wasn't just a feud, it- that creation of the God of Reflections, who was he? No, no, that doesn't matter, the scales. Whatever the scales were waiting for, they're about to start tipping again, aren't they? Something big is coming, maybe because Norlathel is going to die? No, wait, how is Norlathel supposed to fully ever be- oh no, how many Gates have fallen? Why are so many of them dying? What does it have to do with- The Daughter! By the gods, she's alive, isn't she?"

She scrambled out of the dirt and brushed herself off, looking rather wild. Applo just stood where he was and asked, "The Daughter?"

"Yes, yes." She said, impatiently. "The one Imvadrim called the Namer. You know, the Goddess of Words, the child of the Goddess of Worlds, the only true daughter of the gods. The one who gave every first generation Immortal their names and titles." She waved her hands around frantically. "Everyone assumed she'd died in the War of the Gods, and then after Jorick's disastrous plan to fix the mortals, we all knew that all the gods were gone, dead for good. All except for the locked up twelve. It's so... ironic, really that by locking them away, we managed to save them." A bitter note entered her voice, but she passed it by quickly. "But the Immortal Hunter must have saved her." She looked up, as if looking for Imvadrim, though it was pointless to look for someone who was all around you. "She locked her into a part of the earth, didn't she? That's how you managed to access her power, tap into the thoughts and feelings of the other Immortals. I have to go find her, don't I? That's the reason you showed me all this."

Imvadrim sounded as surprised as an impassive primordial earth deity could sound, "The reason? No, that is not the reason I showed you such things."

"Then what is it?!" Grene yelled, startling Applo. She was not really a yeller, and he'd never seen her look so frantic and distraught.

The response was cold, "Does there have to be a reason?"

For a second, it seemed as if Grene would stamp her foot, but she controlled herself. "Yes, there does! Why else would you show me all of these- these," she struggled with the right word, "all of my fellow Immortal's secrets and their- their pain. Like you said, their nightmares. There has to be a reason for it." She sounded desperate, even to herself.

The Earth Mother was matter-of-fact in the face of her emotion, and her response came after a long pause for thought. "Hum." She said thoughtfully, "I told you before, the truth has no bounds and cares nothing for your needy hearts. But if it is a reason you seek from me, perhaps there is a better answer I can give you. You see, little one, the land changes with her inhabitants. Change is inevitable. It is not evil as you see it, no matter what the consequences are. The land does not care about who occupies her, or what they choose to do. I do not take sides, nor scold my children for their choices in life. Those concern me little, but I do carry them all. Every last one of those who live upon me, even you Invaders. Whether you destroy me or take care of me, whether you love me or hate me. No matter how you cause me to change, I am steadfast in that one duty. Soon, there will come a time for you to make a choice. Not you, yourself, but all your kind, and perhaps some of mine. I pass on this knowledge to you, because you are the one Fatherless Child who may have the wisdom to look at things as the land does. To stand as the representative of one who seeks only to carry. Now go, you are welcome no longer. Peace be to you, young Fragment."

With that, Grene knew her audience with Imvadrim was over. That response had stunned her, and she couldn't think of anything else to say to it, anyways. She packed up her things, resentfully ignoring Applo's attempts to help, and turned to leave. There was too much to think about, and she sort of understood how Marissa had felt now. A god- or whatever Imvadrim was- had dropped a mighty weight onto her shoulders. The weight of the world. The weight of Imvadrim.
 
Last edited:
A History of Iwaku by Herzi of Querzi (Abbr Ver.)

Excess Exposition Chapter III - The Age of Mortals

The Age of Mortals may be the longest of the Ages, and it spans five, relatively distinct periods of time I've come to see as sub-ages, of sorts. Don't fret, I will name all five through the course of this chapter.

Though historical fiction is filled with accounts set at the start of the Age of Mortals, the truth is that it was rather uninteresting in the grand scheme of things. Some have referred to this period as the First Awakening, though it's not as though there were any more, so "First" was probably someone's idea of making it sound grander than it actually was. Writings from mortals during this period are extremely scarce I suspect because few were in the frame of mind to learn how to write from Immortals, if any Immortals were willing to teach them at all. The best that can be surmised from Immortal writings, however, is that the Dismantler of Wars' feat of magic had shocked mortals into gaining consciousness. I'm having a hard time describing this properly, but I think I understand why this period has drawn fictional writers, because the Immortals wrote of the mortals looking around themselves with horror. Some were apparently sickened by it, and a number simply descended into madness, rendered unable to move or choosing to hurl themselves off cliffs or the like. It is said, in fact, that the Grand Cliffs of Shosing were the choice place for most of these deaths, and that is why the ground there now rejects all life. Whether or not this is true, I am not sure of, as few now travel to the cliffs and live to tell the tale.

Dramatic warnings about dangerous locations aside, the Awakening was a sordid affair and the effects of it reverberated for some time. Some mortals decided to continue to kill the Immortals, this time blaming them for what had happened, but most others seemed determined to turn their backs on the past and build an actual society for themselves, and these came to dominate the pool (the ones who wanted to fight faded into the back of history, but my personal theory is that some Immortals took to assassinating the troublesome ones). Slowly, horrifically slowly, it started to work. They cleared bodies, rebuilt crude settlements into good ones, and overall it seemed a peaceful time. The Immortals, though, continue to write of that time with great sorrow. Immortal memories must last longer than ours, I think, because through the years that spanned the First Awakening, hundreds of accounts were written. Some were cut and dry, "The bodies of [such and such] were finally found this morning and burned or put to rest, still [this many] unaccounted for, and possibly many more." Others were deep personal accounts, and I am surprised they were published publicly at all. "I was finally allowed to mourn for Kerra today, mother. We've finally found her body, buried underneath a few mortal corpses and sitting un[der a tree (tear smudges make this difficult to tell)]. It's been 20 years since her death, but the goddess's breath must've preserved her body, [be]cause I still recognized her. It looked like she was just asleep, but I couldn't see her soul. Why didn't you come to the ceremony? We burned her body so it would not get in the way with the other corpses, yet you didn't even come to see her one last time." So on and so forth.

Since there really isn't anything else interesting to be said about this time, I'm going to move on to what happened AFTER most of the rebuilding got done. The mortals went about building up their societies, forgetting the past as generations passed, and the dragons started raiding their settlements instead. The Immortals, on the other hand, did not take to the new peace well. While many purportedly supported the mortals with their magic and teachings, even that had to come to an end at some point. The mortals had killed too many for the Immortals to just forgive them and coexist in harmony. I consider it something of a miracle that the Immortals did not fight amongst themselves as well, with some attempting to slaughter the mortals, though in retrospect it's probably likely that the Dismantler of Wars had a hand in this forced peace. Some few, especially those who had hidden during the Mid-Age, built their own settlements, making families of their own far from the influence of the mortals, but these were far outnumbered by those who chose to wander throughout Iwaku, and from here on is the section of time I call the Sub-Age of Monster Hunters. No one else calls it that, but it fits the bill, because that's basically what happened while we mortals were being peaceful busy bees.

A group of Immortals actively started hunting down "monsters." It started with the killing of a giant that was terrorizing a village of mortals, and the trend caught on quickly. A quick note about the word "monsters." "Monsters" has always been used colloquially to denote people or things that are inhuman and incapable of feeling, but officially, the term also describes magical creatures not found outside of Iwaku, most particularly those that preyed on the mortals and Immortals. Naturally, they weren't much noticed during the Mid-Age when everyone was killing everyone else, and back in the Age of the Gods, they were held back by the power of the gods, but it makes sense to me that they became particular nuisances at this point in time because the "general peace" turned them into the last major threats to mortals and Immortals alike.

The ancient mortals weren't consistently grateful for these monster killings, but I believe it's fairly clear that it mostly gave the Immortals something to do and some way to cope with everything they'd lost in the previous two ages. Killing things is not exactly the most productive way to cope with your feelings, in my opinion, but it was probably well-intentioned, and did indeed make life easier for the mortals. This part of the age of mortals is quite frankly just as uninteresting as the previous one, possibly even more so, but I would like to note with some interest that the Immortal Hunter does not figure as a monster hunter at all – a fact so peculiar that several IMMORTALS themselves mention on occasion how strange it was that she chose not to kill anything at a time when plenty of Immortals were taking that road. As a matter of fact, she utterly vanishes from most writings from this point on, except for two brief notes much much later in some other dusty old history tome that mentions "the Date Upon Which the Four-Fathered Splits with Her Bloodlust" and "the Stipulation of the Dismantler of Wars Upon the Crowning of the First High-King that Speaks of a Just Promise Made to the Embodiment of the Nemesis, Formerly Known as the Immortal Hunter's Half-Soul, as to Prevent in Times Henceforth 'Til the Times of the Next Rulers Any Acts of Treason and Trouble Such that Chaos Might Wish to Cause, Passed Down in Secret Obligation Else Panic Made Known to the People that One May Seek to Destroy Many at Once for Its Own Pleasure." The unnecessary capitalization was not my idea, and I was very tempted to throw that particular book into the fireplace more than once for passages worse than this one.

Anyways, long story short, no Immortal Hunter. Instead, the Nonexistent (who I mentioned in my previous chapter, if you were paying attention), Jorick the Separating, the Cyan Knight, the Mother Melon, Sen aka the Lady of Demons, and many more cropped up everywhere, becoming known as famous monster hunters and heroes to the people. The number of the Formless's formal writings skyrocket during this time, and some include accounts of monster hunts, so I assume that he is one among their number. I mention these figures because their days hunting monsters vastly improved the relations between the Immortals and the mortals, but worsened the relation between the Immortals and Imvadrim, as most of the creatures we classify as monsters were, in fact, Imvadrim's children (according the Mountain-Bound). These two essential dynamics are not explicitly stated anywhere, but it is easy to surmise due to what happened next.

In the year 2682 of the Age of Mortals, the most famous of monster hunters were simultaneously drawn into traps. The Formless, the Nonexistent, and the Immortal known as Jorick the Separating all appeared to have been spared, but they were in the minority. Mortal eye witnesses report all much the same thing (with the odd variation due to hearsay): the Immortals were goaded into a large, empty space with no vegetation, and the ground beneath their feet simply rose up and swallowed them whole. As you all already know, lots of people dying wasn't exactly a new phenomenon at this point, but this "Revenge of the Mother of Monsters" gave the mortals something to squabble about. Because apparently giving us consciences wasn't enough to hold back the bloodthirst we'd been originally made with to begin with, or something. Some began to worry that the land was angry with them and was demanding the rest of the Immortals be taken care of, while others felt that they were deeply indebted to the Immortals. Several generations had passed for most types of the mortals, so their view of the events of the Mid-Age were far less gory and unpleasant both concerning their ancestors and concerning the Immortals. Unbeknownst to them all, this was the start of the third "Sub-Age," which I call the Sub-Age of Wars.

I promise, the concept is not confusing. The now rather-settled mortals had found ways to split themselves up into large geographic groups and strategize. Unlike during the Mid-Age, when they blindly banded together to defeat whatever enemy happened to be in front of them, these new and improved mortals began doing what we do even now: they made countries for themselves, called their cities and ideals sovereign, and got extremely upset when they ran into people who didn't agree with them. This is not to say the Immortals had been peaceful and agreeable all the time, but Immortal feuds in the past involved a lot more cruel pranks, heated arguments, and petty thefts than mutually condoned mass-murder, and though there had been many of them, they had never grown the way the mortal population did in times of peace. The mortals brought with them war as we understand it today. Which is great, because I don't have to explain too much more than that. Wars happened, technology skyrocketed.

The first war was about Immortal-supporters vs Immortal-haters. The next few broke out about land struggles, and there was a particularly interesting one down the line which was about the inferiority of the Galer-residents, which may be why there is still some disconnect between the people of Galer and the rest of Iwaku (though it could also be because Galer is a hostile environment that is difficult to access). Once we started fighting, we didn't really see fit to stop, and for the next few hundred years, the mortals started and ended wars, some short and bloody, some long and bloodless, with no apparent concern for what their high-cost, newfangled consciences were supposed to tell them. In the words of the Formless, "The Keeper of the Scales thought it was stupid and ungrateful, as she had been the one to pay the price, and herself declared that she was 'going to hit the fuckers until their brains settle back into place.'"

Now, obviously I'm getting to the part where the Dismantler of the Great War becomes the Dismantler of Wars, but it's here that the Formless finally explains a little about the Keeper of the Scales, and it's important for why she alone is raised higher than all of the rest of the Immortals. The Dismantler of Wars got so pissed off that she decided to set the mortals straight. And no one decided to help her. At all. Once she got involved, not a single Immortal besides her lifted a finger to do a thing about the mortals fighting each other. Though some had picked sides in previous wars, they all just got up and got out of the way. At the beginning of my study, I was rather puzzled by the lack of Immortal mentions in the wars the Keeper is said to have stopped, but the Formless lays it down in no uncertain terms, "Boulder Soul, the Last D'Dark, the Lady of the Woods, and the many creations of the God of Creatures were among those who had stood beside the mortals in their fights, and they have always been stubborn folk, but everyone knows to get out of the Keeper's way when she's stopped being reasonable. As the Bringer once said, 'The less reasonable she's feeling, the more reasonable she'll make the world, but if you get caught up in it you might find yourself being reconstructed several times over and no one likes that feeling.'"

The Immortal he quotes is not being ambiguous or metaphorical when he says "reconstructed several times over," I believe, because the Dismantler of Wars' specialty was breaking things down and rebuilding them again. It is precisely what she did to stop all the wars. Various mortal gossip suggests many wild things, but official court records are quite consistent about how she would go about it. She would walk into the middle of a battle field, untouchable by any form of weaponry, and then she'd take out a set of weighing scales and every time they tipped to one side, the entire world would break and rebuild, break and rebuild, even the people who got a little too close to her. The ground would crumble under someone's feet and a mountain would sprout under another's, weapons of war would turn to dust and enormous plants would come popping out of solid stone, some people were even said to have died and been resurrected, though I think that's getting to tall tales. Anything she wanted to happen would happen so long as something of some kind of opposite effect also happened at the same time. Trying to attack her did not work, and usually it meant she'd get mad enough to go on wrecking and building things long after everyone had decided to surrender.

Under those conditions, frequent wars became kind of impossible. On the other hand, the mortals were now having problems figuring out whether or not they liked the Immortals anymore, if they'd ever figured it out at all. Some were starting to think that this meant they were now subservient to the Immortals, and they really didn't seem to like that idea, particularly the current rulers of the various self-proclaimed kingdoms at the time. It finally reached a head when someone asked the Dismantler of Wars if she was planning to become some sort of ruler that they had to pay tribute to. Since this happened in an official court, we have her words down verbatim. "Fuckfuckfuckfuckfuckfuck no. Who in all of this world and beyond would want to eternally be stuck babysitting a bunch of shittyass mortals who can't stop killing each other?" This was not a decorous response, but no one was brave enough to say so, and that was probably for good reason. That didn't really stop the talks of "Immortal Overlords" from going on, unfortunately, and so we come to the fourth Sub-Age, which is basically just the Sub-Age of People Being Argumentative, Wishy-Washy, and Confused.

I actually find this part of the history pretty fun, because a lot of rather outrageous things happened. One group of people tried to chase what they thought was an Immortal out of their city, screaming all the while that they would not be subdued, only to find out once they'd killed it that it was actually just a regular ferret, and the poor thing got turned into stew. A couple countries started elaborately attempting to screen people for pure-mortal lineages, even though it was impossible to tell that sort of thing as ancestry records didn't even exist before then and at any rate, offspring of even one Immortal parent produced an Immortal, so as long as the person in question aged past their prime, they were definitely 100% mortal. The scholarly types of the different kingdoms wrote dry essays on the advantages or disadvantages of being deeply involved with the Immortals, but if you pay attention to the content, some of the things they say are hilariously insipid and nitpicky. That said, it wasn't all that exciting from a grand overview point of view. It was much more fun to read about (stuff written before then is mostly either boring or depressing as shit), but nothing much HAPPENED. The Immortals were showing less and less interest in the mortals, and the mortals were no longer allowed to fight battles with each other, but no one could agree on anything because they were all scattered about Iwaku with crappily-run and incommunicative governments. This stagnated state of affairs lasted a good hundred and fifty years or so, until the rise of the very first High-King of Iwaku.

The first High-King of Iwaku was a long-lived gnome mortal named Asmodeus, and he was born and raised in a country called Ayrea, which was falling apart because its main export of metal to be fashioned as weapons had been rendered useless by the lack of wars. His side of this story is a lot of fun, but I don't have the time or patience to go into the details. Here's the overview, though if it interests you I suggest you read his autobiography: He was informally educated by a scholar that had been exiled from a different kingdom for suspected Immortal lineage, made friends with an actual Immortal girl who had run away from home to get away from her overprotective parents, and decided that he was tired of living in a weak country. So he infiltrated the government, got the king killed, began reforming the system by taking power away from the nobles, and tried to start a war with all the other countries out there to bring back some of their previous prosperity.

No one was dumb enough to take the bait and risk angering the Dismantler of Wars, so King Asmo began riding out and raiding other countries instead. Shockingly, these raids were incredibly successful and his country became well-off mostly by stealing a ton of stuff from neighboring countries until they became weak and he offered to marry a member of the royal family as a sign of alliance and in return for the promise to stop raiding. In this way, he started building a little conglomerate of country-state things, which started freaking out other countries who retaliated by forming alliances of their own. Then he tried declaring war on all of them AGAIN, and one little group was cocky enough to answer the challenge. This, obviously, drew the attention of the Dismantler of Wars, and she stepped in before any real fighting could start, but then it turned out that Asmodeus had WANTED to meet the Dismantler of Wars so that she'd give him PERMISSION to start fighting so that he could conquer all of Iwaku.

Obviously, she said no. She also nearly beat him up. Oddly enough, however, she changed her mind a few weeks later and told him she would give him 5 years to try and conquer all of Iwaku, so long as no more blood was shed than absolutely necessary. The King's biography does not explain her change of mind, as he does not seem to know, but he does seem to suspect that another Immortal was behind her decision, which would not surprise me. Whatever the reason, he was given a chance, and he took that chance on with full gusto, threatening, raiding, and allying himself with other countries and groups as if he'd been born to do it. In 5 years, he was sort of an unofficial ruler to everywhere but Galer. The Dismantler came to visit him and told him that his time for raiding and conquering was up, and he'd better not whine about it. To which he asked if she wanted to be ruler instead, and she put her foot down and told him something along the lines of, "Go ahead and call yourself the High-King of all of Iwaku if you want to, moron, but no Immortals are ever going to rule over any country, much less the whole damn continent, so you fucking mortals can stop wasting all of our time freaking out about it." That response pleased him immensely and the gnome decided that he was indeed going to declare himself the High-King of all of Iwaku and thus began the Sub-Age we are in now, which is that of the High Rulers.

It would have been nice if that was all that needed to be talked about, but this Sub-Age has had a lot of "High Rulers" and very few of them got into their positions peacefully. High-King Asmo actually ruled well while he did. He began resolving things between countries using his raiding force as a police of sorts, and the countries actually started to respect the hegemony he had established, as there was a greater flow of trade or something between them, meaning relatively boosted economies for most everyone, but then he made the terrible mistake of making the Immortal girl he'd befriended his official Main Consort and not having any children by anyone at all. He died unexpectedly by choking to death on an apricot seed, and his only note for who should be named heir next was, "someone who isn't a noble and isn't an idiot," which had literally been written on a napkin. People squabbled over who would be the next high ruler, then some kid from the North played chess with a bunch of nobles to prove he was smart enough to be the next ruler, and got them to establish him before anyone had any idea what was really going on. His line ruled for the next couple generations, until his great-grandson turned out to be an idiot of continental proportions and got deposed by a girl who tricked him out of half his belongings and the monarchy in a bet. This girl changed the title from High-King to Overseer because it was gender neutral, and she and her two daughters were the ones who subdued Galer and made it officially part of the sovereign state of Iwaku, then changing the capitol to the White City where they were originally from.

The history books go on like this, because no dynasty after that lasted more than a couple generations - because apparently flaming morons exist in every family line (congratulations, your family is normal) - to the point where it stopped being expected for heirs to be blood-related to the current monarch at all. It wasn't until the sixth change in "dynasty" came along that any more important decisions were implemented. The 18th Overseer of Iwaku was a clever former-thief who took control of the "throne" by promising the Dismantler of Wars that she would make sure Immortals and mortals were all treated fairly, and funnily enough, she was the first Overseer to actually write down and implement a very clear set of laws concerning the Immortals and the succession of the throne. These laws, which she says were written down in conference with the Dismantler of Wars herself, stipulated that the Immortals were to be considered true citizens of Iwaku, neither overlords nor servants to the rest, and would be allowed legal status, employment, and residence in any country they pleased, so long as they registered just as any other law-abiding citizen would. However, no Immortal could become an overarching ruler to all of Iwaku. In return for this, no high ruler could gain full power unless they were approved by a representative of the Immortals (I'm assuming the Dismantler, here) and underwent a formal and public coronation reiterating the oath to be fair to Immortals and mortals alike.

Though her son and granddaughter never managed to achieve what she had achieved, her great-granddaughter showed some wisdom, I think, by changing her title to Princeps Imperatrix, and denoting a set of trusted advisors as the Imperatores under her, allowing her to share absolute power with those she trusted implicitly, but maintain the hierarchy. It was, sadly, an abused system, and a number of her successors used it poorly and ended up deposed because of it, but this is the system still in use today by our current high ruler, Princeps Imperatrix Vay, with her sole Imperator Rory.

[PUBLISHER'S NOTE: Since the original publication of this work and the author's death, the Dismantler of Wars and most of the other Immortals have not been heard from. A great deal of unrest has cropped up outside of the White City, particularly among areas with less civilization and more monsters. There have also been reports of people being turned into food items, though it has been impossible to find solid evidence for these claims. With monsters growing agitated and restless, a number of the nobility of Galer have banded together and begun clearing out more affected areas. The current Imperatores Vay and Rory are old and have been unable to subdue the unrest, and it is this editor's opinion that they will soon be on their way out, replaced by the more militant Galerians, who are quickly rising in popularity.]

It would be easy for me to leave it at that and say "all's well that ends well, and they all lived happily ever after," but I'll leave you all with a word of caution. The Age of the Gods started off with what was likely a great tragedy, some say, and every age thenceforth has similarly started with some tragedy or sacrifice, including the informal Sub-Ages. Ages have varied in length, but the end of each of these ages was predicted by one or several prophecies whose origin we have no way of determining. The thing is, in the past few years, the number of prophecies finding their ways into Immortal writings have increased almost exponentially, far more than could possibly have already come to pass. So I fully expect that this is not the end of troubles for Iwaku. Not by a long shot. Here's to hoping I'm dead by the time it starts.
 
  • Bucket of Rainbows
  • Nice Execution!
Reactions: Nemopedia and rissa
Status
Not open for further replies.